2008 MAXIMA OWNER'S MANUAL

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN Before driving your vehicle please read this Own- ● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with er’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity for important safety information.
confidence. It was produced using the latest with controls and maintenance requirements, as-
techniques and strict quality control. sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle. MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This manual was prepared to help you under- This vehicle should not be modified.
stand the operation and maintenance of your WARNING Modification could affect its
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome- IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE- performance, safety or durability, and
ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this MINDERS FOR SAFETY! may even violate governmental
manual before operating your vehicle. regulations. In addition, damage or per-
Follow these important driving rules to
A separate Warranty Information Booklet help ensure a safe and complete trip for formance problems resulting from modi-
explains details about the warranties cov- you and your passengers! fications may not be covered under
ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service NISSAN warranties.
● NEVER drive under the influence of al-
and Maintenance Guide” explains details
cohol or drugs.
about maintaining and servicing your ve-
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer ● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will and never drive too fast for conditions.
explain how to resolve any concerns you
● ALWAYS give your full attention to driv-
may have with your vehicle, as well as
ing and avoid using vehicle features or
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon
taking other actions that could distract
law.
you.
Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle ● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-
best. When you require any service or have any priate child restraint systems. Preteen
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the children should be seated in the rear
extensive resources available to them. seat.
● ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.

੬ REVIEW COPY—2008 Maxima (max)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
06/08/07—debbie ੭

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all options CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
available on this model. Therefore, you may find WARNING
some information that does not apply to your
vehicle.
WARNING
All information, specifications and illustrations in
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
this manual are those in effect at the time of
and certain vehicle components contain
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
or emit chemicals known to the State of
specifications or design without notice and with-
California to cause cancer and birth de-
out obligation.
fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
THIS MANUAL and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
You will see various symbols in this manual. They State of California to cause cancer and
are used in the following ways: APD1005 birth defects or other reproductive harm.
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this” CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
WARNING
or “Do not let this happen.”
This is used to indicate the presence of a ADVISORY
hazard that could cause death or serious Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra- ies, may contain perchlorate material. The
risk, the procedures must be followed tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate
precisely. vehicle. Material – special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
hazard that could cause minor or moder- indicate movement or action.
ate personal injury or damage to your ve-
hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-
cedures must be followed carefully. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
call attention to an item in the illustration.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

BLUETOOTH௡ is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed to
Visteon.

© 2007 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to following information:
For U.S. customers
provide NISSAN directly with comments or – Your name, address, and telephone number Nissan North America, Inc.
questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the Consumer Affairs Department
sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s P.O. Box 685003
number:
side) Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For U.S. customers
– Date of purchase For Canadian customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
Nissan Canada Inc.
(1-800-647-7261) – Current odometer reading 5290 Orbitor Drive
For Canadian customers – Your NISSAN dealer’s name Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
1-800-387-0122
– Your comments or questions
OR

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

Table of Illustrated table of contents 0
Contents Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1
Instruments and controls 2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4
Starting and driving 5
In case of emergency 6
Appearance and care 7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8
Technical and consumer information 9
Index 10

06/08/07—debbie ੭

0 Illustrated table of contents

Airbags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

06/08/07—debbie ੭

AIRBAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS

1. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-20)
2. Rear head restraint (P. 1-7)
3. Rear seat belts (P. 1-9)
4. Roof mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-35)
5. Front seat mounted side-impact
supplemental air bags (P. 1-35)
6. Front seat active head restraints
(P. 1-7, P. 1-8)
7. Front seat belts (P. 1-9)
8. Supplemental front impact air bags
(P. 1-35)
9. Seats (P. 1-2)
10. Occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor) (P.1-43)
11. Seat belt pretensioners (P. 1-50)
12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) (P. 1-19)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.

LII0065

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

06/08/07—debbie ੭

EXTERIOR FRONT

1. Engine hood (P. 3-18)
2. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-22)
3. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29)
4. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-20)
5. Windshield (P. 8-19)
6. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-39)
7. Power windows (P. 2-37)
8. Door locks, Intelligent key system, keys,
request button (P. 3-4, 3-6, 3-2, 3-6)
9. Mirrors (P. 3-24)
10. Tire pressure (P. 8-31)
11. Flat tire (P. 6-2)
12. Tire chains (P. 8-39)
13. Cornering light (P. 2-27)
14. Fog light switch (P. 2-26)
15. Tie down hooks (P. 6-12)

WII0086

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

06/08/07—debbie ੭

EXTERIOR REAR

1. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-21)
2. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-19)
3. Trunk lid (P. 3-18)
4. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)
5. Tie-down hook (P. 6-12)
6. Exterior trunk lid release/request button
(P. 3-12)
7. Rear sonar system (P. 5-22)
8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29)
9. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation
(P. 3-20, P. 9-3)
10. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-20)
11. Child safety locks (P. 3-6)

WII0131


06/08/07—debbie ੭

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

1. Interior trunk access (P. 1-6)
2. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-39)
3. Sun visors (P. 3-23)
4. Interior lights, illuminated entry (P. 2-41)
5. HomeLinkா (if so equipped) (P. 2-43)
6. Automatic anti-glare inside mirror
(if so equipped) (P. 3-24)
7. Glove box (P. 2-34)
8. Front cup holders (P. 2-33)
9. Front console (P. 2-34)
10. Front seat (P. 1-2)
11. Rear seat (P. 1-6)

WII0126


06/08/07—debbie ੭

INSTRUMENT PANEL

8. Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-20)
9. Display screen/Navigation system*
(P. 4-2, P. 4-6)
controls (P. 4-2, P. 4-6)
11. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-35)
12. Glove box (P. 2-34)
13. Audio system controls (P. 4-22)
14. Climate controls (P. 4-19)
15. Storage (P. 2-32)
16. Power outlet (P. 2-31)
17. Shift selector lever (P. 5-9)
18. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-27)
19. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-45)
20. Ignition switch (P. 5-6)
21. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls
(P. 3-22)
22. Traction Control System (TCS) off
LIC0988 switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-29) or
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off
1. Side and center ventilators (P. 4-18) 4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-30)
2. Headlight/fog light/turn signal switch
23. Rear sonar system off switch
(P. 2-22) (P. 1-35, P. 2-28)
6. Security indicator light (P. 2-17) (if so equipped) (P. 2-30)
3. Steering wheel switch for audio control
7. Cruise control main/set switches 24. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-25)
and Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
25. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-26)
System (if so equipped) (P. 4-44, 4-46) (P. 5-14)

06/08/07—debbie ੭

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).


06/08/07—debbie ੭

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS

1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)
2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)
3. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)
4. Air cleaner (P. 8-16)
5. Battery (P. 8-13)
6. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-21)
7. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)
8. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)
9. Drive belt location (P.8-15)
10. Fuse block (P. 8-21)
11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-12)
12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)
NOTE:
Engine cover removed for clarity.

WDI0525


06/08/07—debbie ੭

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning Name Page Warning Name Page Indicator Name Page
light light light

Anti-lock Braking 2-11 Low tire pressure 2-12 Continuously Vari- 2-14
or System (ABS) warn- warning light able Transmission
ing light (CVT) indicator light
Low windshield 2-13
washer fluid warning Continuously Vari- 2-15
Brake warning light 2-11 light able Transmission
or (CVT) position indi-
P position selecting 2-13 cator light
warning light
CRUISE main 2-15
Seat belt warning 2-14 switch indicator light
Charge warning 2-11
light and chime
light
Cruise SET switch 2-15
Supplemental air 2-14 indicator light
Door open warning 2-11
bag warning light
light
Front passenger air 2-15
Trunk lid open warn- 2-14 bag status light
Engine oil pressure 2-12
ing light
warning light
High beam indicator 2-15
Intelligent Key sys- 2-12 light (blue)
tem warning light
Malfunction indica- 2-15
Low fuel warning 2-12 tor light (MIL)
light


06/08/07—debbie ੭

Indicator Name Page
light

Slip indicator light (if 2-16
so equipped)

Traction Control 2-16
System off indicator
light (if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard 2-16
indicator lights

Vehicle Dynamic 2-16
Control off indicator
light (if so equipped)


06/08/07—debbie ੭

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Front manual seat adjustment — Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
passenger’s side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
Front power seat adjustment System (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
(for driver’s seat and if so equipped for Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
passenger’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Child restraint installation using the seat
Head restraint adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Front-Seat Active Head Restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Booster seat installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Precautions on supplemental restraint
Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51

06/08/07—debbie ੭

SEATS

FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT — PASSENGER’S
SIDE

ARS1152

WARNING ● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when be upright. Always sit well back in the
the seatback is reclined. This can be seat with both feet on the floor and
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not adjust the seat properly. See “Precau-
be against your body. In an accident, tions on Seat Belt Usage” later in this
you could be thrown into it and receive section.
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and ● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
receive serious internal injuries. to make sure it is securely locked.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

06/08/07—debbie ੭

LRS0244 LRS0245
Forward and backward Reclining
Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean
seat forward or backward to the desired position. back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever
Release the lever to lock the seat in position. up and lean your body forward. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in P (Park).

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

06/08/07—debbie ੭

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later
in this section). Also, the seatback can be re-
clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-
hicle is stopped and the transmission is in P
(Park).

WRS0163

FRONT POWER SEAT See “Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped)”
ADJUSTMENT (for driver’s seat and if in “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” for auto-
matic drive positioner operation.
so equipped for passenger’s seat)
Forward and backward
Operating tips
Moving the switch forward or backward will slide
● The power seat motor has an auto-reset the seat forward or backward to the desired
overload protection circuit. If the motor position.
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,
then reactivate the switch. Reclining
● Do not operate the power seat switch for a Move the recline switch backward until the de-
long period of time when the engine is off. sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
This will discharge the battery. forward again, move the switch forward and
move your body forward. The seatback will move
forward.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

WRS0164 LRS0239 LRS0238

Seat lifter (driver’s seat) Manual Power

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or
Lumbar support (driver’s seat)
down to adjust the angle and height of the seat The lumbar support feature provides lower back
cushion. support to the driver. Move the lever up or down
(manual) or move the switch forward or backward
(power) to adjust the seat lumbar area.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

᭺
1 Push down on the button on the rear parcel ● Closely supervise children when they
shelf. are around cars to prevent them from
᭺
2 Fold down the passenger side seatback. playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
WARNING jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo when not in use, and prevent children’s
area or on the rear seat when it is in the access to car keys.
fold-down position. Use of these areas
by passengers without proper restraints
could result in serious injury in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
● When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched posi-
tion. If they are not completely secured,
LRS0246 passengers may be injured in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
FOLDING REAR SEAT
Interior trunk access
For models without rear center console, the trunk
can be accessed from the passenger side of the
rear seat for loading and unloading, as shown.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

LRS0247 LIC0401 WRS0133
To fold down the driver side of the rear seat, reach Center armrest Type A — Front
through the opening and pull on the strap ᭺ 1
HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT
located behind the seat. Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower,
The rear seats can be locked using the mechani-
push and hold the lock knob and push the head
cal key to prevent unauthorized access.
restraint down.

WARNING
Head restraints should be adjusted prop-
erly as they may provide significant pro-
tection against injury in an accident. Do
not remove them. Check the adjustment
after someone else uses the seat.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

LRS0240 WRS0134 SPA1025
Type B — Rear FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level RESTRAINTS
with the center of your ears.
WARNING
● Always adjust the head restraints prop-
erly as specified in this section. Failure
to do so can reduce the effectiveness of
the Active Head Restraint.
● Active Head Restraints are designed to
supplement other safety systems. Al-
ways wear seat belts. No system can
prevent all injuries in any accident.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

SEAT BELTS

● Do not attach anything to the head re-
straint stalks. Doing so could impair
Active Head Restraint function.
The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-
ing the force that the seatback receives from the
occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement
of the head restraint helps support the occu-
pant’s head by reducing its backward movement
and helping absorb some of the forces that may
lead to whiplash type injuries.
Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions
at low to medium speeds in which it is said that
whiplash injury occurs most.
SSS0136
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
restraints return to their original positions. USAGE
Properly adjust the Active Head Restraints as If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-
described earlier in this section. justed and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,
even if your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be worn
at all times when a vehicle is being driven.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

SSS0134 SSS0016

WARNING WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this ● The seat belt should be properly ad-
vehicle should use a seat belt at all justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
times. Children should be properly re- reduce the effectiveness of the entire
strained in the rear seat and, if appro- restraint system and increase the
priate, in a child restraint. chance or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. Serious injury or death can occur
if the seat belt is not worn properly.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely ● All seat belt assemblies, including re-
fastened to the proper buckle. tractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
mends that all seat belt assemblies in
effectiveness.
use during a collision be replaced un-
● Do not allow more than one person to less the collision was minor and the
use the same seat belt. belts show no damage and continue to
● Never carry more people in the vehicle operate properly. Seat belt assemblies
than there are seat belts. not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either
● If the seat belt warning light glows con- damage or improper operation is noted.
tinuously while the ignition is turned
ON with all doors closed and all seat ● All child restraints and attaching hard-
SSS0014 belts fastened, it may indicate a mal- ware should be inspected after any col-
function in the system. Have the system lision. Always follow the restraint
WARNING checked by a NISSAN dealer. manufacturer’s inspection instructions
and replacement recommendations.
● Always route the shoulder belt over ● Once the pretensioner has activated, it The child restraints should be replaced
your shoulder and across your chest. cannot be reused and must be replaced if they are damaged.
Never run the belt behind your back, together with the retractor. See your
under your arm or across your neck. The NISSAN dealer. CHILD SAFETY
belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off your shoulder. ● Removal and installation of the seat Children need adults to help protect them.
belt pretensioner components should They need to be properly restrained.
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as be done by a NISSAN dealer.
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE In addition to the general information in this
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could manual, child safety information is available from
increase the risk of internal injuries in many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
an accident. government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

There are three basic types of child restraint for infants and small children. See “Child Re- facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s
systems: straints” later in this section. instructions for minimum and maximum weight
and height recommendations. NISSAN recom-
● Rear facing child restraint Also, there are other types of child restraints
mends that small children be placed in child
available for larger children for additional protec-
● Front facing child restraint restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle
tion.
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
● Booster seat
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens Safety Standards. You should choose a child
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size. and children be restrained in the rear seat. restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less According to accident statistics, children the manufacturer’s instructions for installation
than 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rear are safer when properly restrained in the and use.
facing child restraints. Front facing child re- rear seat than in the front seat.
straints are available for children who outgrow Larger children
This is especially important because your
rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys- Children who are too large for child restraints
old. Booster seats are used to help position a tem (Air bag system) for the front passen- should be seated and restrained by the seat belts
vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no ger. See “Supplemental restraint system” which are provided. The seat belt may not fit
longer use a front facing child restraint. later in this section. properly if the child is less than 4 feet 9 inches
(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18
WARNING Infants kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed used to obtain proper seat belt fit.
Infants and children need special protec-
tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit in a rear facing child restraint. NISSAN recom- NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a
them properly. The shoulder belt may mends that infants be placed in child restraints commercially available booster seat if the shoul-
come too close to the face or neck. The that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety der belt in the child’s seating position fits close to
lap belt may not fit over their small hip Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat
bones. In an accident, an improperly fit- Standards. You should choose a child restraint belt goes across the abdomen. The booster seat
ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu- should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is
injury. Always use appropriate child facturer’s instructions for installation and use. properly positioned across the top, middle por-
restraints. tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the
Small Children
hips. A booster seat can only be used in seating
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri- Children that are over one year old and weigh at positions that have a three-point type seat belt.
tories require the use of approved child restraints least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

06/08/07—debbie ੭

have a label certifying that it complies with Fed- THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian WITH RETRACTOR
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child
has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or
WARNING
near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt
without the booster seat. ● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
WARNING times.
Never let a child stand or kneel on any ● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
seat and do not allow a child in the cargo the seatback is reclined. This can be
areas while the vehicle is moving. The dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
child could be seriously injured or killed in be against your body. In an accident,
an accident or sudden stop. you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
PREGNANT WOMEN could also slide under the lap belt and WRS0174
receive serious internal injuries. Manual front seat shown
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, ● For the most effective protection when Fastening the seat belts
and always position the lap belt as low as pos- the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
sible around the hips, not the waist. Place the be upright. Always sit well back in the
᭺
1 Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this
section.
shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your seat with both feet on the floor and
chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your adjust the seat belt properly.
abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow
the driver and passengers some freedom of
movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly of during
impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode or
child restraint mode locks the seat belt for child
restraint installation.
When the ALR is activated, the seat belt cannot
be extended again until the seat belt tongue is
detached from the buckle and fully retracted.
After the seat belt fully retracts, the seat belt
WRS0137 WRS0138
returns to the Emergency Locking Retractor
᭺
2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor ᭺
3 Position the lap belt portion low and snug (ELR) mode. See “Child restraints” later in this
and insert the tongue into the buckle until on the hips as shown. section for more information.
you hear and feel the latch engage.
᭺
4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the The ALR should be used only for child re-
● The retractor is designed to lock during retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
straint installation. During normal seat belt
a sudden stop or on impact. A slow shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
use by a passenger, the locking mode
pulling motion permits the seat belt to and across your chest.
move, and allows you some freedom of should not be activated. If it is activated it
The front passenger seat and the rear seating may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-
movement in the seat.
positions three-point seat belts have two modes sion. It can also change the operation of
● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from of operation: the front passenger air bag. See “Front
its fully retracted position, firmly pull passenger air bag status light” later in this
● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
the belt and release it. Then smoothly section.
pull the belt out of the retractor. ● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR).


06/08/07—debbie ੭

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
WARNING
check the operation as follows.
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely se- ● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
cured in the latched position. If they are quickly. The retractor should lock and re-
not completely secured, passengers may strict further belt movement.
be injured in an accident or sudden stop. If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any questions about seat belt opera-
tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

WRS0139
Unfastening the seat belts
᭺
1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on
the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-
tracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
movement by two separate methods:
● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor.
● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

WARNING ● Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
● After adjustment, release the adjust- extender. Such unnecessary use could
ment button and try to move the shoul- result in serious personal injury in the
der belt anchor up and down to make event of an accident.
sure it is securely fixed in position.
● Never use seat belt extenders to install
● The shoulder belt anchor height should child restraints. If the child restraint is
be adjusted to the position best for you. not secured properly, the child could be
Failure to do so may reduce the effec- seriously injured in a collision or a sud-
tiveness of the entire restraint system den stop.
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident. SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS ● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
LRS0242 mild soap solution or any solution recom-
If, because of body size or driving position, it is mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
Shoulder belt height adjustment (Front not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts
seats) and fasten it, an extender is available which is to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts
compatible with the installed seat belts. The ex- to retract until they are completely dry.
The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-
tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of
justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau- ● If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
length and may be used for either the driver or
tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.) guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN
To adjust, pull out the adjustment button ᭺ and
1 belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
dealer for assistance if an extender is required.
move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
position ᭺, so the belt passes over the center of
2
WARNING ● Periodically check to see that the seat
the shoulder. The belt should be away from your
● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made belt and the metal components, such as
face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
by the same company which made the buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul- and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,
der belt anchor into position. original equipment seat belts, should
be used with NISSAN seat belts. deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-
sembly should be replaced.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

CHILD RESTRAINTS

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An in-
flating supplemental front air bag could
seriously injure or kill your child. A rear-
facing child restraint must only be used
in the rear seat.
● NISSAN recommends that the child re-
straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-
cording to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat. If
you must install a front facing child re-
ARS1098 WRS0256 straint in the front seat, see “Child re-
straint installation using the seat belts”
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD WARNING later in this section.
RESTRAINTS ● Improper use or improper installation
● Infants and small children should al-
ways be placed in an appropriate child of a child restraint can increase the risk
restraint while riding in the vehicle. or severity of injury for both the child
Failure to use a child restraint can re- and other occupants of the vehicle and
sult in serious injury or death. can lead to serious injury or death in an
accident.
● Infants and small children should never
be carried on your lap. It is not possible ● Follow all of the child restraint manu-
for even the strongest adult to resist the facturer’s instructions for installation
forces of a severe accident. The child and use. When purchasing a child re-
could be crushed between the adult and straint, be sure to select one which will
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the fit your child and vehicle. It may not be
same seat belt around both your child possible to properly install some types
and yourself. of child restraints in your vehicle.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

● If the child restraint is not anchored ● When your child restraint is not in use, Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
properly, the risk of a child being in- keep it secured with the LATCH System infants and small children of various sizes. When
jured in a collision or a sudden stop or a seat belt to prevent it from being selecting any child restraint, keep the following
greatly increases. thrown around in case of a sudden stop points in mind:
or accident. ● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
● Child restraint anchor points are de-
signed to withstand only those loads that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
imposed by correctly fitted child re- CAUTION Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
straints. Under no circumstances are Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
Remember that a child restraint left in a
they to be used for adult seat belts or closed vehicle can become very hot. ● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
harnesses. Check the seating surface and buckles sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi- before placing your child in the child and seat belt system.
tioned to fit the child restraint, but as restraint.
● If the child restraint is compatible with your
upright as possible. vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
● After attaching the child restraint, test it restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the and check the various adjustments to be
before you place the child in it. Push it Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System sure the child restraint is compatible with
from side to side while holding the seat or LATCH. Some child restraints include two rigid your child. Choose a child restraint that is
near the LATCH attachment or by the designed for your child’s height and weight.
or webbing-mounted attachments that can be
seat belt path. Try to tug it forward and Always follow all recommended procedures.
connected to these lower anchors. For details,
check to see if the belt holds the re- see the “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
straint in place. The child restraint System (LATCH)” later in this section. territories require that infants and small
should not move more than 1 inch (25 children be restrained in an approved child
mm). If the restraint is not secure, If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint at all times while the vehicle is
tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. See being operated.
restraint in another seat and test it “Child restraint installation using the seat belts”
again. You may need to try a different later in this section. In general, child restraints are
child restraint. Not all child restraints fit also designed to be installed with the lap portion
in all types of vehicles. of a lap/shoulder seat belt.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

● Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using the
LATCH anchors. The child restraint will
not be secured properly.
● Child restraint anchor points are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstance are
they to be used for adult seat belts or
harnesses.

WRS0718 WRS0700
LATCH system anchor locations LATCH lower anchor location
LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHERS LATCH lower anchor point locations
FOR CHILDREN SYSTEM (LATCH) The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of the
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor seat cushion near the seatback. A label is at-
points that are used with Lower Anchors and tached to the seatback to help you locate the
Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH) compat- LATCH anchors.
ible child restraints. This system may also be
referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible WARNING
system. With this system, you do not have to use
● Attach LATCH compatible child re-
a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint.
straints only at the locations shown in
The LATCH anchor points are provided to install the illustration. If a child restraint is not
child restraints in the rear outboard seating posi- secured properly, your child could be
tions only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint seriously injured or killed in an
in the center position using the LATCH anchors. accident.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD
RESTRAINT
If the manufacturer of your child restraint requires
the use of a top tether strap, it must be secured to
the anchor point.

WARNING
Child restraint anchor points are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses.
LRS0661 LRS0662
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
Installing child restraint LATCH anchor LATCH child restraints generally require the use
of a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap child
attachments restraint” later in this section for installation in-
LATCH compatible child restraints include two structions.
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can When installing a child restraint, carefully read
be connected to two anchors located at certain and follow the instructions in this manual and
seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys- those supplied with the child restraint. See “Child
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to restraint installation using LATCH” in this section.
secure the child restraint. Check your child re-
straint for a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the in-
structions provided by the child restraint manu-
facturer.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

3. Position the top tether strap over the top of ● The LATCH anchors are designed to
the seatback. withstand only those loads imposed by
4. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor correctly fitted child restraints. Under
bracket that provides the straightest instal- no circumstance are they to be used for
lation. adult seat belts or harnesses.
● Inspect the lower anchors by inserting
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the
your fingers into the lower anchor area
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
and feeling to make sure there are no
slack. obstructions over the LATCH anchors,
If you have any questions when installing a such as seat belt webbing or seat cush-
top tether strap child restraint on the rear ion material. The child restraint will not
seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for de- be secured properly if the LATCH an-
tails. chors are obstructed.
LRS0243
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION Front-facing
Top Tether Anchor Point Locations USING LATCH Follow these steps to install a front-facing child
Anchor points ᭺ are located on the rear parcel
1 restraint using LATCH:
shelf. WARNING 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
Installing top tether strap ● Attach LATCH compatible child re- ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
straints only at the locations shown. For er’s instructions.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt the LATCH lower anchor locations, see
or LATCH (rear outboard seat positions only), as “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-
applicable. dren System (LATCH)” in this section. If
a child restraint is not secured properly,
1. Flip up the anchor cover from the anchor your child could be seriously injured or
point which is located directly behind the killed in an accident.
child seat.
2. Remove the head restraint. Store it in a
secure location.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

LRS0663 LRS0664 LRS0671
Front facing web-mounted – step 2 Front facing rigid-mounted – step 2 Front facing – step 4
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach- interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try 4. For child restraints that are equipped with
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check another seating position or a different child re- webbing mounted attachments, remove any
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop- straint. additional slack from the anchor attach-
erly attached to the lower anchors. ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
3. The back of the child restraint should be knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
secured against the vehicle seat back.. and seatback while tightening the webbing
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint of the anchor attachments.
to obtain the correct child restraint fit. See “Head 5. If the child restraint is equipped with a top
restraint adjustment” in this section. If the head tether strap, route the top tether strap and
restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
sure to install the head restraint when the child point. See “Top tether strap child restraint” in
restraint is removed. If the seating position does this section.
not have an adjustable head restraint and it is

06/08/07—debbie ੭

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3
through 6.
Rear-facing
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using LATCH System:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.

WRS0697 LRS0665
Front facing – step 6 Rear facing web-mounted – step 2
6. Before placing the child in the child restraint, 2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
hold the child restraint near the LATCH at- ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
tachment and use force to push the child to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
restraint from side to side, and tug it forward erly attached to the lower anchors.
to make sure that it is securely held in place.
It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If
it does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull
again on the anchor attachments to further
tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to
properly secure the restraint, move the re-
straint to another seating position and try
again, or try a different child restraint. Not all
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

LRS0666 LRS0673 LRS0674
Rear facing rigid-mounted – step 2 Rear facing – step 3 Rear facing – step 4
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
3. For child restraints that are equipped with 4. Before placing the child in the child restraint, properly secured prior to each use. If the
webbing mounted attachments, remove any hold the child restraint near the LATCH at- child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2
additional slack from the anchor attach- tachment and use force to push the child through 4.
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly restraint from side to side, and tug it forward
in the center of the child restraint with your to make sure that it is securely held in place.
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If
and seatback while tightening the webbing it does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull
of the anchor attachments. again on the anchor attachments to further
tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to
properly secure the restraint, move the re-
straint to another seating position and try
again, or try a different child restraint. Not all
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

● NISSAN recommends that child re- The instructions in this section apply to child
straints be installed in the rear seat. restraint installation using the vehicle seat belts in
However, if you must install a forward the rear seat or the front passenger seat.
facing child restraint in the front pas-
senger seat, move the passenger seat
to the rearmost position. Also, be sure
the front passenger air bag status light
is illuminated to indicate the passenger
air bag is OFF. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this sec-
tion for details.
● The three-point seat belt in your vehicle
is equipped with an Automatic Locking
WRS0256 Retractor (ALR) which must be used
when installing a child restraint.
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
● Failure to use the ALR mode will result
USING THE SEAT BELTS in the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
WARNING otherwise be unsecured and cause in-
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air jury to the child in a sudden stop or
Bag System, never install a rear-facing collision. Also, it can change the opera-
child restraint in the front passenger tion of the front passenger air bag. See
seat. Supplemental front air bags in- “Front passenger air bag and status
flate with great force. A rear-facing light” later in this section.
child restraint could be struck by the ● A child restraint with a top tether strap
supplemental front air bag in a crash should not be used in the front passen-
and could seriously injure or kill your ger seat.
child.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions
The back of the child restraint should be secured
against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust
or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct
child restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjust-
ment” in this section.
If the head restraint is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint
when the child restraint is removed. If the seating
position does not have an adjustable head re-
straint and it is interfering with the proper child
WRS0699 restraint fit, try another seating position or a dif- WRS0680
Front-facing (front passenger seat) – step 1 ferent child restraint. Front facing – step 3
Front-facing 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
seats or in the front passenger seat: structions for belt routing.
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
front-facing direction only. Move the
seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and therefore
must not be used in the front seat.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

LRS0667 LRS0668 WRS0681
Front facing – step 4 Front facing – step 5 Front facing – step 6
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the 6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode the center of the child restraint with your
(child restraint mode). It reverts to Emer- knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
gency Locking Retractor mode when the and seatback while pulling up on the seat
seat belt is fully retracted. belt.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

8. Before placing the child in the child restraint,
hold the child restraint near the seat belt
path and use force to push the child restraint
from side to side, and tug it forward to make
sure that it is securely held in place. It should
not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does
move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on
the shoulder belt to further tighten the child
restraint. If you are unable to properly secure
the restraint, move the restraint to another
seating position and try again, or try a differ-
ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in
all types of vehicles.
9. Check that the retractor is in the Automatic
WRS0698 LRS0316
Locking Retractor mode by trying to pull
Front facing – step 7 more seat belt out of the retractor. If you Front facing – step 11
7. If the child restraint is equipped with a top cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the 11. If the child restraint is installed in the front
tether strap, route the top tether strap and retractor, the retractor is in the Automatic passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor Locking Retractor mode. the ON position. The front passenger air bag
point (rear seat installation only). See “Top status light should illuminate. If this
10. Check to make sure the child restraint is light is not illuminated see ЉFront passenger
tether strap child restraint” in this section. properly secured prior to each use. If the
Do not install child restraints that require the air bag status lightЉ in this section. Move
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 the child restraint to another seating
use of a top tether strap to seating positions through 8.
that do not have a top tether anchor. position. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the Automatic Locking Re-
tractor mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

WRS0256 WRS0682 LRS0669
Rear-facing – step 1 Rear facing – step 2 Rear facing – step 3
Rear-facing 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child 3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to is in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode
restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in- (child restraint mode). It reverts to Emer-
seats: structions for belt routing. gency Locking Retractor mode when the
1. Child restraints for infants must be seat belt is fully retracted.
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Always follow the restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

LRS0670 WRS0683 WRS0684
Rear facing – step 4 Rear facing – step 5 Rear facing – step 6
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the 5. Remove any additional slack from the child 6. Before placing the child in the child restraint,
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. restraint; press downward and rearward hold the child restraint near the seat belt
firmly in the center of the child restraint to path and use force to push the child restraint
compress the vehicle seat cushion and seat- from side to side, and tug it forward to make
back while pulling up on the seat belt. sure that it is securely held in place. It should
not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does
move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on
the shoulder belt to further tighten the child
restraint. If you are unable to properly secure
the restraint, move the restraint to another
rear seating position and try again, or try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

BOOSTER SEATS

7. Check that the retractor is in the Automatic ● Infants and small children should never
Locking Retractor mode by trying to pull be carried on your lap. It is not possible
more seat belt out of the retractor. If you for even the strongest adult to resist the
cannot pull any more seat belt webbing out forces of a severe accident. The child
of the retractor, the retractor is in the Auto- could be crushed between the adult and
matic Locking Retractor mode parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the
8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is same seat belt around both your child
properly secured prior to each use. If the belt and yourself.
is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. ● NISSAN recommends that the booster
After the child restraint is removed and the seat seat be installed in the rear seat. Ac-
belt fully retracted, the Automatic Locking Re- cording to accident statistics, children
tractor mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat. If
ARS1098 you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, see “Booster seat installa-
PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER tion” in this section.
SEATS ● A booster seat must only be installed in
a seating position that has a
WARNING lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a
● Infants and small children should al- three-point type seat belt with a
ways be placed in an appropriate child booster seat can result in a serious in-
restraint while riding in the vehicle. jury in sudden stop or collision.
Failure to use a child restraint or ● Improper use or improper installation
booster seat can result in serious injury of a booster seat can increase the risk
or death. or severity of injury for both the child
and other occupants of the vehicle and
can lead to serious injury or death in an
accident.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

● Do not use towels, books, pillows or ● After placing the child in the booster
other items in place of a booster seat. seat and fastening the seat belt, make
Items such as these may move during sure the shoulder portion of the belt is
normal driving or a collision and result away from the child’s face and neck and
in serious injury or death. Booster seats the lap portion of the belt does not
are designed to be used with a cross the abdomen.
lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de-
● Do not put the shoulder belt behind the
signed to properly route the lap and
child or under the child’s arm. If you
shoulder portions of the seat belt over
must install a booster seat in the front
the strongest portions of a child’s body
seat, see “Booster seat installation”
to provide the maximum protection dur-
later in this section.
ing a collision.
● When your booster seat is not in use,
● Follow all of the booster seat manufac-
keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-
turer’s instructions for installation and
vent it from being thrown around in LRS0455
use. When purchasing a booster seat,
case of a sudden stop or accident. Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
be sure to select one which will fit your
child and vehicle. It may not be possible several manufacturers. When selecting any
to properly install some types of CAUTION booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
booster seats in your vehicle. Remember that a booster seat left in a ● Choose only a booster seat with a label
● If the booster seat and seat belt is not closed vehicle can become very hot. certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
used properly, the risk of a child being Check the seating surface and buckles Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
injured in a collision or a sudden stop before placing your child in the booster Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
greatly increases. seat.
● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi- sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
tioned to fit the booster seat, but as and seat belt system.
upright as possible.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION
WARNING
● NISSAN recommends that booster
seats be installed in the rear seat. How-
ever, if you must install a booster seat in
the front passenger seat, move the pas-
senger’s seat to the rearmost position.

CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Auto-
matic Locking Retractor mode when using
a booster seat with the seat belts.
LRS0453 LRS0464
● Make sure the child’s head will be properly All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
supported by the booster seat or vehicle territories require that infants and small
seat. The seat back must be at or above the children be restrained in an approved child
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a restraint at all times while the vehicle is
low back booster seat ᭺ is chosen, the
1 being operated.
vehicle seat back must be at or above the The instructions in this section apply to booster
center of the child’s ears. If the seat back is seat installation in the rear seats or the front
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a passenger seat.
high back booster seat ᭺ should be used.
2

● If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with your
child. Always follow all recommended pro-
cedures.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

WRS0699 LRS0451 LRS0452
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the Rear center position Rear outboard position
rear seat or in the front passenger seat: 3. The booster seat should be positioned on
1. If you must install a booster seat in the the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces-
front seat, move the seat to the rear- sary, adjust or remove the head restraint to
most position. obtain the correct booster seat fit. See
“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only section. If the head restraint is removed,
place it in a front facing direction. Always store it in a secure place. Be sure to install
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in- the head restraint when the booster seat is
structions. removed. If the seating position does not
have an adjustable head restraint and it is
interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
try another seating position or a different
booster seat.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low PRECAUTIONS ON
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions for adjusting the belt routing. SYSTEM
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-
toward the retractor to take up extra slack. tion contains important information concerning
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned the driver and passenger supplemental front air
across the top, middle portion of the child’s bags (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System), front
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the bags, roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
belt routing. mental air bag and seat belt pretensioners.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc- Supplemental front impact air bag system:
tions for properly fastening a seat belt The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help
shown in the “Three-point seat belt with LRS0454 cushion the impact force to the head and chest of
retractor” earlier in this section. Front passenger position the driver and front passenger in certain frontal
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front collisions.
passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
status light may or may not illuminate, mental air bag system: This system can help
depending on the size of the child and the cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic
type of booster seat being used. See “Front area of the driver and front passenger in certain
passenger air bag and status light” later in side impact collisions. The front seat side-impact
this section. supplemental side air bags are designed to in-
flate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the head of occu-
pants in front and rear outboard seating positions
in certain side impact collisions. The curtain side-


06/08/07—debbie ੭

impact air bags are designed to inflate on the side
where the vehicle is impacted.
These supplemental restraint systems are de-
signed to supplement the crash protection pro-
vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts
and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts
should always be correctly worn and the occu-
pant seated a suitable distance away from the
steering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-
ers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section for
instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position. WRS0031
After turning the ignition key to the ON WARNING
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag ● The supplemental front air bags ordi-
warning light will turn off after about 7 narily will not inflate in the event of a
seconds if the system is operational. side impact, rear impact, rollover, or
lower severity frontal collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various kinds
of accidents.
● The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit or if the front passenger seat
is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air
bag status light” later in this section.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

● The seat belts and the supplemental ● The front passenger seat is equipped
front air bags are most effective when with an occupant classification sensor
you are sitting well back and upright in (pressure sensor) that turns the front
the seat. The front air bags inflate with passenger air bag OFF under some
great force. Even with the NISSAN Ad- conditions. This sensor is only used in
vanced Air Bag System, if you are unre- this seat. Failure to be properly seated
strained, leaning forward, sitting side- and wearing the seat belt can increase
ways or out of position in any way, you the risk or severity of injury in an acci-
are at greater risk of injury or death in a dent. See “Front Passenger air bag sta-
crash. You may also receive serious or tus light” later in this section.
fatal injuries from the supplemental
● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-
front air bag if you are up against it
ing wheel. Placing them inside the
when it inflates. Always sit back against
steering wheel rim could increase the
the seatback and as far away as practi-
risk that they are injured when the
cal from the steering wheel or instru-
supplemental front air bag inflates.
ment panel. Always use the seat belts.
● The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
advanced air bag system monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt us-
age then inflates the air bags. Failure to
properly wear seat belts can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

ARS1133 ARS1041

WARNING
● Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044


06/08/07—debbie ੭

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An in-
flating supplemental front air bag could
seriously injure or kill your child. See
“Child restraints” earlier in this section
for details.

ARS1045 WRS0256

WARNING
● Children may be severely injured or
killed when the supplemental front air
bags, front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bags and roof-
mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bags inflate if they are not
properly restrained. Pre-teens and chil-
dren should be properly restrained in
the rear seat, if possible.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

WARNING
● The seat belts, the front seat-mounted
side-impact supplemental air bags and
roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bags are most effec-
tive when you are sitting well back and
upright in the seat with both feet on the
floor. The side air bag and curtain side-
impact air bag inflate with great force.
Do not allow anyone to place their
hand, leg or face near the side air bag
on the side of the seatback of the front
seat or near the side roof rails. Do not
SSS0101 SSS0188 allow anyone sitting in the front seats or
rear outboard seats to extend their
WARNING hand out of the window or lean against
the door. Some examples of dangerous
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
riding positions are shown in the previ-
mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
ous illustrations.
side-impact supplemental air bags:
● The front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bags or roof-mounted
curtain side-impact supplemental air
bag ordinarily will not inflate in the
event of a frontal impact, rear impact,
rollover or lower severity side collision.
Always wear your seat belts to help
reduce the risk or severity of injury in
various kinds of accidents.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

WRS0032 SSS0159 SSS0162

WARNING
● When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front seat.
If the side air bag inflates, you may be
seriously injured. Be especially careful
with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
● Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
supplemental side air bag inflation.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

8. Seat belt buckle switches for driver’s
and passenger’s side
9. Occupant classification sensor (pres-
sure sensor)
10. Seat belt pretensioner
11. Side satellite sensor
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front
passenger seats. This system is designed to
meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-
lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,
all of the information, cautions and warn-
ings in this manual still apply and must be
followed.
The driver supplemental front air bag is located in
the center of the steering wheel. The passenger
supplemental front air bag is mounted in the
dashboard above the glove box. The supplemen-
WRS0466 tal front air bags are designed to inflate in higher
1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact 4. Air bag Control Unit (ACU) severity frontal collisions, although they may in-
supplemental air bag inflators 5. Supplemental front air bag modules flate if the forces in another type of collision are
6. Crash zone sensor similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.
supplemental air bags 7. Occupant classification system control
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact unit indication of proper supplemental front air bag
supplemental air bag modules system operation.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the The supplemental front air bags operate
stage inflators. It also monitors information from front of this Owner’s Manual. only when the ignition switch is in the ON
the crash zone sensor, the Air Bag Control Unit or START position.
When a supplemental front air bag inflates, a
(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant clas- After turning the ignition key to the ON
fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the
sification sensor (pressure sensor) and passen- position, the supplemental air bag warning
release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and
ger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation is light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to
based on the severity of a collision and seat belt warning light will turn off after about 7
not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and chok-
usage for the driver. For the front passenger, it seconds if the system is operational.
ing. Those with a history of a breathing condition
additionally monitors the weight of an occupant
should get fresh air promptly.
or object on the seat and seat belt tension. Based
on information from the sensors, only one front air Supplemental front air bags, along with the use of
bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on
crash severity and whether the front occupants the face and chest of the front occupants. They
are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front can help save lives and reduce serious injuries.
passenger air bag may be automatically turned However, an inflating front air bag may cause
OFF under some conditions, depending on the facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags
weight detected on the passenger seat and how do not provide restraint to the lower body.
the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag
Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts
is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be
should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-
illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will
senger seated upright as far as practical away
not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See
from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The
“Front passenger air bag and status light” later in
supplemental front air bags inflate quickly in order
this section for further details. One front air bag
to help protect the front occupants. Because of
inflating does not indicate improper performance
this, the force of the front air bag inflating can
of the system.
increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too
If you have any questions about your air bag close to, or is against, the front air bag module
system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN during inflation.
dealer. If you are considering modification of your
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact


06/08/07—debbie ੭

Status light to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-
The front passenger air bag status light is
matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used
located below the radio. The light operates as
to meet the requirements.
follows:
One sensor used is the occupant classification
● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The is
sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of the
OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF
front passenger seat cushion and is designed to
and will not inflate in a crash.
detect an occupant and objects on the seat by
● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult, weight. It works together with seat belt sensors
child or child restraint as outlined in this described later. For example, if a child is in the
section: The illuminates to indicate front passenger seat, the advanced air bag sys-
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag
will not inflate in a crash. OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a
LRS0316 child restraint of the type specified in the regula-
● Occupied passenger seat and the passen- tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’s
Front passenger air bag status light ger meets the conditions outlined in this weight can be detected and cause the air bag to
section: The light is OFF to indicate turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-
WARNING that the front passenger air bag is operation can vary depending on the front passenger
The front passenger air bag is designed to tional. seat belt sensors.
automatically turn OFF under some con- Front passenger air bag The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-
ditions. Read this section carefully to signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the
learn how it operates. Proper use of the The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-
amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when
seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec- matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated
it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode
essary for most effective protection. Fail- under some conditions as described below in
(child restraint mode). Based on the weight on
ure to follow all instructions in this accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front
the seat detected by the occupant classification
manual concerning the use of seats, seat passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a
sensor and the belt tension detected on the seat
belts and child restraints can increase the crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your
belt, the advanced air bag system determines
risk or severity of injury in an accident. vehicle are not part of this system.
whether the front passenger air bag should be
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce automatically turned OFF as required by the
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag regulations.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are instead of being OFF. See “Child restraints” ear- that the child restraint or seat belt is not being
properly seated and using the seat belt as out- lier in this section for proper use and installation. used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is
lined in this manual should not cause the passen- installed properly, the seat belt is used properly
If the front passenger seat is not occupied the
ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush- occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting
the object’s weight detected by the occupant If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-
on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out
classification sensor. Other conditions could also minate even though you believe that the child
of position), this could cause the sensor to turn result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant standing on the seat, or if two children are on the properly positioned, the system may be sensing
improperly uses the seat belt in the Automatic seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
Locking Retractor mode (child restraint mode), Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the
this could cause the air bag to be turned OFF. are seated and restrained properly. system is OFF by using a special tool. However,
Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can until you have confirmed with your dealer that
belt properly for the most effective protection by
monitor when the front passenger air bag is au- your air bag is working properly, reposition the
the seat belt and supplemental air bag.
tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied. occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil- The light will not illuminate when the front pas-
The air bag system and passenger air bag status
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat. senger seat is unoccupied.
light will take a few seconds to register a change
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen- in the passenger seat status. For example, if a
restraints and booster seats be properly installed
ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating large adult who is sitting in the front passenger
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant
that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag
classification sensor and seat belt sensors are
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat status light will go from OFF to ON for a few
designed to operate as described above to turn
properly or not using the seat belt properly. seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system
the front passenger air bag OFF for specified
operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
child restraints as required by the regulations. If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
Failing to properly secure child restraints and to the passenger air bag status light may or may not If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
use the Automatic Locking Retractor mode (child be illuminated, depending on the size of the child bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
restraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip or and the type of child restraint being used. If the air light , located in the meter and gauges area
move in an accident or sudden stop. This can also bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that in the center of the instrument panel, will blink.
result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

Other supplemental front air bag precau- ● Tampering with the supplemental front ● Work on and around the supplemental
tions air bag system may result in serious front air bag system should be done by
personal injury. Tampering includes a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electri-
WARNING changes to the steering wheel and the cal equipment should also be done by a
● Do not place any objects on the steer- instrument panel assembly by placing NISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Re-
ing wheel pad or on the instrument material over the steering wheel pad straint System (SRS) wiring should not
panel. Also, do not place any objects and above the instrument panel or by be modified or disconnected. Unautho-
between any occupant and the steering installing additional trim material rized electrical test equipment and
wheel or instrument panel. Such ob- around the air bag system. probing devices should not be used on
jects may become dangerous projec- the air bag system.
● Modifying or tampering with the front
tiles and cause injury if the supplemen- passenger seat may result in serious ● A cracked windshield should be re-
tal front air bag inflates. personal injury. For example, do not placed immediately by a qualified re-
● Immediately after inflation, several change the front seats by placing mate- pair facility. A cracked windshield could
front air bag system components will be rial on the seat cushion or by installing affect the function of the supplemental
hot. Do not touch them; you may se- additional trim material, such as seat air bag system.
verely burn yourself. covers, on the seat that are not specifi-
● The SRS wiring harness connectors are
cally designed to assure proper air bag
● No unauthorized changes should be yellow and orange for easy
operation. Additionally, do not stow any
made to any components or wiring of identification.
objects under the front passenger seat
the supplemental air bag system. This is or the seat cushion and seatback. Such When selling your vehicle, we request that you
to prevent accidental inflation of the objects may interfere with the proper inform the buyer about the supplemental front air
supplemental air bag or damage to the operation of the occupant classifica- bag system and guide the buyer to the appropri-
supplemental air bag system. tion sensor (pressure sensor). ate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to ● No unauthorized changes should be
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- made to any components or wiring of
pension system or front end structure. the seat belt system. This may affect the
This could affect proper operation of supplemental front air bag system.
the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system
may result in serious personal injury.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and pants in the front and rear outboard seating po-
roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental sitions. They can help save lives and reduce
air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity serious injuries. However, inflating front seat-
side collisions, although they may inflate if the mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and
forces in another type of collision are similar to roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental
those of a higher severity side impact. They are air bags may cause abrasions or other injuries.
designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact
collisions. supplemental air bags do not provide restraint to
the lower body.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
indication of proper front seat-mounted side-
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
impact supplemental air bag and roof-mounted practical away from the front seat-mounted side-
curtain side-impact supplemental air bag opera- impact supplemental air bag. Rear seat passen-
LRS0259 tion. gers should be seated as far away as practical
Front seat-mounted side-impact When the front seat-mounted side-impact from the door finishers and side roof rails. The
supplemental air bag and roof- supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air
side-impact supplemental air bags inflate, a fairly bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact
mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bags inflate quickly in order to
loud noise may be heard, followed by release of
supplemental air bag system smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not help protect the front occupants. Because of this,
indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale the force of the side air bag and curtain side-
The front seat-mounted side-impact supplemen- impact air bag inflating can increase the risk of
tal air bags are located in the outside of the it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those
with a history of a breathing condition should get injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against,
seatback of the front seats. The roof-mounted these air bag modules during inflation. The front
curtain side-impact supplemental air bags are fresh air promptly.
seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
located in the side roof rails. These systems are The front seat-mounted side-impact supplemen- and roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help tal air bag, along with the use of seat belts, help to mental air bags will deflate quickly after the colli-
reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occu- cushion the impact force on the chest and pelvic sion is over.
pants. However, all of the information, cau- area of the front occupants. Roof-mounted cur-
tions and warnings in this manual still ap- tain side-impact supplemental air bags help to
ply and must be followed. The front seat- cushion the impact force to the head of occu-

06/08/07—debbie ੭

The front seat-mounted side-impact ● No unauthorized changes should be ● Work around and on the roof-mounted
supplemental air bag and roof-mounted made to any components or wiring of curtain side-impact supplemental air
curtain side-impact supplemental air bags the front seat-mounted side-impact bag system should be done by a
operate only when the ignition switch is in supplemental air bag and roof-mounted NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical
the ON or START positions. curtain side-impact supplemental air equipment should also be done by a
After turning the ignition key to the ON bag system. This is to prevent acciden- NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring har-
tal inflation of the side air bag and cur- nesses* should not be modified or dis-
position, the supplemental air bag warning
tain side-impact air bag or damage to connected. Unauthorized electrical test
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
the side air bag and curtain side-impact equipment and probing devices should
warning light will turn off after about 7 air bag system not be used on the side air bag or cur-
seconds if the system is operational. tain air bag system
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
WARNING your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- * The SRS wiring harness connectors are
pension system or side panel. This yellow and orange for easy identification.
● Do not place any objects near the seat- could affect proper operation of the
back of the front seats. Also, do not supplemental side air bag and curtain When selling your vehicle, we request that you
place any objects (an umbrella, bag, side-impact air bag system. inform the buyer about the supplemental side air
etc.) between the front door finisher bag and curtain side-impact air bag system and
and the front seat. Such objects may ● Tampering with the front seat-mounted guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this
become dangerous projectiles and side-impact supplemental air bag sys- Owner’s Manual.
cause injury if the supplemental side air tem may result in serious personal in-
bag inflates. jury. For example, do not change the
front seats by placing material near the
● Right after inflation, several side air bag seatbacks or by installing additional
and front seat-mounted side-impact trim material, such as seat covers,
supplemental air bag components will around the side air bag
be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

Seat belts with pretensioners (Front ● If you need to dispose of the preten- If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioners, the
seats) sioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a supplemental air bag warning light will not
NISSAN dealer. Correct pretensioner come on, will flash intermittently or will turn on for
disposal procedures are set forth in the 7 seconds and remain on after the ignition key
WARNING has been turned to the ON or START position. In
appropriate NISSAN Service Manual.
● The pretensioners cannot be reused af- Incorrect disposal procedures could this case, the pretensioner may not function
ter activation. They must be replaced cause personal injury. properly. They must be checked and repaired.
together with the retractor and buckle Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer.
as a unit The front seat belt pretensioners activate in con-
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
junction with the supplemental air bag systems.
● If the vehicle becomes involved in a inform the buyer about the seat belt pretension-
Working with the seat belt retractor, it helps
frontal collision but the pretensioner is ers and guide the buyer to the appropriate sec-
tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes
not activated, be sure to have the pre- tions in this Owner’s Manual.
involved in certain types of collisions, helping to
tensioner system checked and, if nec-
restrain front seat occupants.
essary, replaced by your NISSAN
dealer. The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt’s
retractor. These seat belts are used the same as
● No unauthorized changes should be
conventional seat belts.
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioners. This is to prevent When the pretensioner activates, smoke is re-
damage to or accidental activation of leased and a loud noise may be heard. This
the pretensioner. Tampering with the smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
pretensioner system may result in seri- Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
ous personal injury. cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
● Work around and on the pretensioners of a breathing condition should get fresh air
should be done by a NISSAN dealer. promptly.
Installation of electrical equipment After the pretensioners have activated, load lim-
should also be done by a NISSAN iters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pretensioners


06/08/07—debbie ੭

curtain side-impact supplemental air bag mod-
ules, seat belt pretensioners and all related wir-
ing.
When the ignition key is in the ON or START
position, the supplemental air bag warning light
illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
supplemental front air bag, side-impact supple-
mental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag and pretensioner systems
need servicing:
WRS0169 LRS0100 ● The supplemental air bag warning light re-
1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (located SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
on the sun visors) WARNING LIGHT ● The supplemental air bag warning light
2. Front seat-mounted side-impact flashes intermittently.
supplemental air bags Warning Labels The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying in the instrument panel, moni- ● The supplemental air bag warning light does
(located on the door pillar) not come on at all.
tors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag,
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air Under these conditions, the supplemental front
WARNING LABELS bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple- air bag, side-impact supplemental air bags, roof-
Warning labels about the supplemental front air mental air bag and seat belt pretensioner system. mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air
bag, supplemental side air bag and curtain side- The circuits monitored by the supplemental air bags or pretensioners may not operate properly.
impact air bag systems are placed in the vehicle bag warning light are the Air bag Control Unit It must be checked and repaired. Take your ve-
as shown in the illustration. (ACU), crash zone sensor, satellite sensors, front hicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer.
seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
modules, side air bag modules, roof-mounted


06/08/07—debbie ੭

maintenance. The ignition switch should always ● If you need to dispose of the supple-
WARNING
be in the LOCK position when working under the mental air bag, pretensioners or scrap
If the supplemental air bag warning light hood or inside the vehicle. the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer.
is on, it could mean that the supplemental Correct supplemental air bag and pre-
front air bag, front seat-mounted side- WARNING tensioner disposal procedures are set
impact supplemental air bags, roof- forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service
mounted curtain side-impact and rollover ● Once a supplemental front air bag,
side-impact supplemental air bag, roof- Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures
supplemental air bag and/or pretension- could cause personal injury.
ers will not operate in an accident. To help mounted curtain side-impact and
avoid injury to yourself or others, have supplemental air bag has inflated, the
your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer air bag module will not function again
as soon as possible. and must be replaced. Additionally, if
any of the supplemental front air bags
Repair and replacement procedure inflate, the activated pretensioners
must also be replaced. The air bag mod-
The supplemental front air bags, front seat- ule and pretensioners should be re-
mounted side-impact supplemental air bags, placed by a NISSAN dealer. The air bag
roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental module and pretensioners cannot be
air bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed repaired.
to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder,
● The supplemental front air bag, side-
unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag impact supplemental air bag, roof-
warning light remains illuminated after inflation mounted curtain side-impact air bag
has occurred. Repair and replacement of these systems, and the pretensioners should
supplemental air bag systems should be done be inspected by a NISSAN dealer if
only by a NISSAN dealer. there is any damage to the front end or
When maintenance work is required on the ve- side portion of the vehicle.
hicle, the supplemental front air bags, front seat-
mounted side-impact supplemental air bags,
roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental
air bags, pretensioners and related parts should
be pointed out to the person performing the

06/08/07—debbie ੭

MEMO


2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-25
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Zone variation change procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Heated seats (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-10 Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Traction Control System (TCS) off switch
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Rear sonar system off switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . 2-30
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Xenon headlights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Covered storage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

06/08/07—debbie ੭

Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Cargo nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 HomeLinkா universal transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Programming HomeLinkா. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Programming HomeLinkா for Canadian
SkyView™ glass-paneled roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Operating the HomeLinkா universal
Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Reprogramming a single HomeLinkா button . . . . . . 2-45
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46

06/08/07—debbie ੭

INSTRUMENT PANEL

8. Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-20)
(P. 4-2, P. 4-6)
controls (P. 4-2, P. 4-6)
11. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-35)
12. Glove box (P. 2-34)
13. Audio system controls (P. 4-22)
14. Climate controls (P. 4-19)
15. Storage (P. 2-32)
16. Power outlet (P. 2-31)
17. Shift selector lever (P. 5-9)
18. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-27)
19. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-45)
20. Ignition switch (P. 5-6)
21. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls
(P. 3-22)
22. Traction Control System (TCS) off
LIC0988 switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-29) or
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off
1. Side and center ventilators (P. 4-18) 4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-30)
2. Headlight/fog light/turn signal switch
23. Rear sonar system off switch (if so
(P. 2-22) (P. 1-35, P. 2-28)
6. Security indicator light (P. 2-17) equipped) (P. 2-30)
3. Steering wheel switch for audio control
7. Cruise control main/set switches 24. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-25)
and Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
25. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-26)
System (if so equipped) (P. 4-44, 4-46) (P. 5-14)
2-2 Instruments and controls

06/08/07—debbie ੭

METERS AND GAUGES

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).

LIC0989
1. Tachometer
2. Warning/indicator lights
3. Speedometer .
4. Fuel gauge
5. Engine coolant temperature gauge
6. Odometer (total/twin trip)
Instruments and controls 2-3

06/08/07—debbie ੭

Resetting the trip odometer:
Push the change button ᭺ for more than 1
3
second to reset the trip odometer to zero.
Elapsed time, driving distance and average
speed information is also available. Refer to
“Control panel buttons” in the “Display screen,
heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems”
section later in this manual.

LIC0990 LIC0991
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Odometer/Twin trip odometer
Speedometer The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed.
The odometer ᭺ records the total distance the
1
vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer ᭺ records the distance
2
of individual trips.
Changing the display
Push the change button ᭺ to change the display
3
as follows:
Trip → Trip → Trip


06/08/07—debbie ੭

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-
mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. If the engine is over-
heated, continued operation of the ve-
hicle may seriously damage the engine.
See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In
case of emergency” section for immediate
action required.

LIC0992 WIC1009
TACHOMETER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo- GAUGE
lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-
into the red zone ᭺.
1
ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the
normal range ᭺ when the gauge needle points
1
CAUTION within the zone shown in the illustration.
When engine speed approaches the red
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-
gine speed. Operating the engine in the outside air temperature and driving conditions.
red zone may cause serious engine
damage.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle. dicates the direction of the vehicle’s heading.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press
CAUTION the button as described in the chart below
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel, to activate various features of the automatic anti-
the Malfunction Indicator Light glare rearview mirror.
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as Push and hold Feature:
possible. After a few driving trips, the (Push button again for about 1 sec-
button for about: ond to change settings)
the light should turn off. If the
1 second Compass display toggles on/off
light remains on after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a Compass zone can be changed to
5 seconds
NISSAN dealer. correct false compass readings
9 seconds Compass enters calibration mode
WIC0993 ● For additional information, see “Mal-
FUEL GAUGE function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in For information about the automatic anti-glare
this section. feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-
in the tank. ments” section.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the
ignition key is turned to OFF.
The low fuel warning light ( ) comes on
when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-
ters E (Empty).


06/08/07—debbie ੭

You can also calibrate the compass by driving
your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-
pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three
complete circles.

LIC0583
Push the button for about 1 second when
the ignition switch is in the ON position to toggle
the compass display ᭺ on or off. The display will
1
indicate the direction of the vehicle’s heading.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by
driving the vehicle in three complete circles at
less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).


06/08/07—debbie ੭

ZONE VARIATION CHANGE
PROCEDURE
The difference between magnetic north and geo-
graphical north is known as variance. In some
areas, this difference can sometimes be great
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow
these instructions to set the variance for your
particular location if this happens:
1. Press and hold the button for about 5
seconds. The current zone number will ap-
pear in the display. Release the button.
2. Find your current location on the zone map.
Refer to the illustration.
3. Press the button repeatedly to toggle
through the zone numbers until the desired
number appears in the display. Once you
have selected a zone number, the display
will show a compass direction within a few
seconds.
Inaccurate compass direction:
The compass display is equipped with automatic
correction function. If the correct direction is not
shown, follow this procedure.
1. With the display turned on, press and hold
the switch for about 9 seconds. The
WIC0355
display will read “C.”

06/08/07—debbie ੭

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle
in three complete circles at a maximum
speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).
3. After completing the circles the display
should return to normal.
● If the compass deviates from the correct
indication soon after repeated adjustment,
have the compass checked at an authorized
dealer.
● The compass may not indicate the correct
compass point in tunnels or while driving up
or down a steep hill. (The compass returns
to the correct compass point when the ve-
hicle moves to an area where the geomag-
netism is stabilized.)

CAUTION
● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the op-
eration of the compass.
● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) Low windshield washer fluid warning light Cruise SET switch indicator light
warning light

or Brake warning light P Position selecting warning light Front passenger air bag status light

Charge warning light Seat belt warning light and chime High beam indicator light (Blue)

Door open warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

Engine oil pressure warning light Trunk lid open warning light Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

Intelligent Key system warning light Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Traction control system off indicator light
indicator light (if so equipped)

Low fuel warning light Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
position indicator light

Low tire pressure warning light CRUISE main switch indicator light Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light
(if so equipped)

CHECKING BULBS If equipped, the following lights come on briefly If any light fails to come on, it may indicate
and then go off: a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake electrical system. Have the system repaired
and turn the ignition key to the ON position or , , , , , ,
promptly.
without starting the engine. The following lights , ,
will come on:
, or , , ,


06/09/07—cathy ੭

WARNING LIGHTS Low brake fluid warning light ● If the brake fluid level is below the
or Anti-lock Braking When the ignition key is in the ON position, the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
System (ABS) light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
comes on while the engine is running with the brake system has been checked at a
warning light NISSAN dealer.
parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, perform the following:
the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light
Charge warning light
illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
ABS is operational. as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main- If this light comes on while the engine is running,
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this it may indicate the charging system is not func-
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the manual. tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check
engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN
system checked by a NISSAN dealer. warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer immediately.
dealer.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func- CAUTION
tion is turned off. The brake system then operates WARNING
normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See Do not continue driving if the generator
ЉBrake systemЉ in the ЉStarting and drivingЉ sec- ● Your brake system may not be working belt is loose, broken or missing.
properly if the warning light is on. Driv-
tion.
ing could be dangerous. If you judge it Door open warning light
or Brake warning light to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest
service station for repairs. Otherwise, This light comes on when any of the doors are not
have your vehicle towed because driv- closed securely while the ignition key is in the ON
This light functions for both the parking brake and
ing it could be dangerous. position.
the foot brake systems.
● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-
Parking brake indicator gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
When the ignition key is in the ON position, the level may increase your stopping dis-
light comes on when the parking brake is applied. tance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

Engine oil pressure warning The Intelligent Key system warning light blinks Low tire pressure warning
light red if the Intelligent Key is taken outside of the light
vehicle while the ignition switch is in the ACC or
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the ON position. Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
light flickers or comes on during normal driving, Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine ● If the Intelligent Key system warning light pressure of all tires except the spare.
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other blinks, make sure of the location of the Intel-
ligent Key as soon as possible. The Intelli- The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
authorized repair shop.
gent Key should be carried by the driver tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
The engine oil pressure warning light is not while operating the vehicle. functioning properly.
designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the
● The Intelligent Key system warning light After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in
turns off about 10 seconds after the Intelli- position, this light illuminates for about 1 second
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
gent Key is brought inside the vehicle. and turns off.
this manual.
The Intelligent Key system warning light blinks Low tire pressure warning:
CAUTION green indicating that the Intelligent Key battery is If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pres-
Running the engine with the engine oil almost discharged. sure, the warning light will illuminate. If you select
pressure warning light on could cause se- See “Intelligent Key system” in the “Pre-driving the tire pressure information in the display (if so
rious damage to the engine almost imme- checks and adjustments” section. equipped), the LOW PRESSURE warning mes-
diately. Such damage is not covered by sage will be displayed. The tire pressure for each
warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it Low fuel warning light tire will also be displayed.
is safe to do so.
When the low tire pressure warning light illumi-
This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel
Intelligent Key system warning tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-
nates, you should stop and adjust the tire pres-
light sure to the recommended COLD tire pressure
nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.
The Intelligent Key system warning light illumi- (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel The low tire pressure warning light does not
nates green when the ignition switch can be in the tank when the fuel gauge needle automatically turn off when the tire pressure is
turned. The Intelligent Key system warning light reaches E (Empty). adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recom-
illuminates red when the ignition switch cannot mended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at
be turned. speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the

06/09/07—cathy ੭

TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning ● If the light illuminates while driving, ● Replacing tires with those not originally
light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire avoid sudden steering maneuvers or specified by NISSAN could affect the
pressure. abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, proper operation of the TPMS.
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure pull off the road to a safe location and
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. CAUTION
driving” section and in the “In case of emergency” Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and in- ● The TPMS is not a substitute for the
section. regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-
TPMS malfunction: rious vehicle damage could occur and check the tire pressure regularly.
may lead to an accident and could re- ● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low sult in serious personal injury. Check of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the
tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi- the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust TPMS may not operate correctly.
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is the tire pressure to the recommended
placed in the ON position. The light will remain on COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire ● Be sure to install the specified size of
after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a and Loading Information label to turn tires to the 4 wheels correctly.
NISSAN dealer. the low tire pressure warning light OFF.
If the light still comes on while driving
Low windshield washer fluid
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure warning light
after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
may be flat. If you have a flat tire, re- This light comes on when the windshield washer
driving” section. place it with a spare tire as soon as
fluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluid
possible.
WARNING as necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
● If the light does illuminate with the ig- is replaced, tire pressure will not be manual.
nition switch in the ON position, have indicated, the TPMS will not function
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer and the low tire pressure warning light P position selecting warning
as soon as possible. will flash for approximately 1 minute. light
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
The light blinks red and warning buzzer beeps
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
when the selector lever is not in the P position
possible for tire replacement and/or
and you are outside the vehicle with the Intelli-
system resetting.
gent Key.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

When the warning light blinks, move the selector Supplemental air bag warning WARNING
lever to the P position and return the ignition light
switch to the LOCK position. If the supplemental air bag warning light
When the ignition key is in the ON or START is on, it could mean that the supplemental
Seat belt warning light and position, the supplemental air bag warning light front air bag, supplemental side air bag,
chime illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns curtain side-impact air bag systems (if so
off. This means the system is operational. equipped) and/or seat belt pretensioners
The light and chime remind you to fasten your
will not operate in an accident. To help
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the If any of the following conditions occur, the avoid injury to yourself or others, have
ignition key is turned to the ON or START position supplemental front air bags, supplemental side your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer
and remains illuminated until the driver’s seat belt air bags, curtain side-impact air bags, and pre- as soon as possible.
is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds
tensioner seat belt systems need servicing and
for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt Trunk lid open warning light
your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:
is securely fastened.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if ● The supplemental air bag warning light re-
This light comes on when the trunk lid is not
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
securely closed while the ignition key is in the ON
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For ● The supplemental air bag warning light position.
7 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON flashes intermittently.
position, the system does not activate the warn- INDICATOR LIGHTS
ing light for the front passenger. ● The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all. Continuously Variable
Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental
Transmission (CVT) indicator
for precautions on seat belt usage. restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre- light
tensioner seat belts may not function properly. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the light
For additional details see “Supplemental restraint comes on for 2 seconds.
system” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

Continuously Variable Front passenger air bag the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly,
Transmission (CVT) position status light and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4
liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
indicator light The front passenger air bag status light ( )
will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be After a few driving trips, the light should
When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- turn off if no other potential emission control
tion, this indicator light shows the CVT selector OFF depending on how the front passenger seat
is being used. system malfunction exists.
lever position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual. For front passenger air bag status light operation, If this indicator light comes on steady for 20
see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when
Cruise main switch indicator the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental the engine is not running, it indicates that the
light restraint system” section of this manual. vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-
tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-
The light comes on when the cruise control main High beam indicator light ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the
switch is pushed. The light goes out when the (blue) “Technical and consumer information” section of
main switch is pushed again. When the cruise
This blue light comes on when the headlight high this manual.
main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise
control system is operational. beams are on and goes out when the low beams Operation
are selected.
Cruise set switch indicator The high beam indicator light also comes on
The malfunction indicator light will come on in
light one of two ways:
when the passing signal is activated.
● Malfunction indicator light on steady — An
The light comes on while the vehicle speed is Malfunction indicator light emission control system and/or CVT mal-
controlled by the cruise control system. If the light (MIL) function has been detected. Check the fuel-
blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate filler cap. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or
the cruise control system is not functioning prop- If the malfunction indicator light comes on steady
missing, tighten or install the cap and con-
erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN or blinks while the engine is running, it may indi-
tinue to drive the vehicle. The light
dealer. cate a potential emission control and/or CVT
should turn off after a few driving trips. If
malfunction.
the light does not turn off after a few
The malfunction indicator light may also come on driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have
the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure your vehicle towed to the dealer.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

● Malfunction indicator light blinking — An en- Slip indicator light (if so tor light while you are driving, have the Traction
gine misfire has been detected which may equipped) Control System checked by a NISSAN dealer.
damage the emission control system. To re- This indicator light will blink when the traction While the Traction Control System is operating,
duce or avoid emission control system dam- control system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery you might feel slight vibration or hear the system
age: road conditions may exist if the slip indicator working when starting the vehicle or accelerat-
– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving ing, but this is normal.
accordingly.
(72 km/h).
The slip indicator light also comes on when you Turn signal/hazard indicator
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. lights
turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light
– avoid steep uphill grades. will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal
operational. If the light does not come on or does
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo switch is activated.
not go off, have the traction control system
being hauled or towed. checked by a NISSAN dealer. Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned
The malfunction indicator light may stop blinking on.
Traction Control System off
and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected Vehicle Dynamic Control off
by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer. This indicator light comes on when the traction
control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indi- This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle
CAUTION cates the Traction Control System is not operat- Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF.
ing. This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control sys-
Continued vehicle operation without hav- tem is not operating.
ing the emission control system checked Push the traction control off switch again or re-
and repaired as necessary could lead to start the engine and the system will operate nor- Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, mally. See “Traction Control System (TCS)” in the again or restart the engine and the system will
and possible damage to the emission con- “Starting and driving” section of this manual. operate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control
trol system. (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
The traction control light also comes on when you
tion of this manual.
turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light
will turn off after about 2 seconds if the Traction The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on
Control System (TCS) is operational. If the light when you turn the ignition key to the ON position.
stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica- The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the

06/08/07—debbie ੭

SECURITY SYSTEMS

system is operational. If the light stays on or Light reminder chime
comes on along with the SLIP indicator light
while you are driving, have the Vehicle Dynamic With the ignition switch in the OFF position, a
Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer. chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened if
the headlights or parking lights are on.
While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-
the system working when starting the vehicle or ing the vehicle.
accelerating, but this is normal. Intelligent Key door buzzer
AUDIBLE REMINDERS The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any one
Brake pad wear warning of the following improper operations is found.
● The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.
when locking the doors.
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the LIC0301
● Any doors are not closed securely when
vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake locking the doors. Your vehicle has two types of security systems:
pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the warning sound is heard. When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both ● Vehicle security system
the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. See “Intelli-
● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
Key reminder chime gent Key system” in the “Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section. VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove The vehicle security system provides visual and
the key and take it with you when leaving the audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors
vehicle. or trunk lid when the system is armed. It is not,
however, a motion detection type system that
activates when a vehicle is moved or when a
vibration occurs.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-

06/08/07—debbie ੭

ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a Intelligent Key operation: ● If the key is turned slowly when locking
brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition, the driver’s door, the system may not
● Push the button. All doors lock. arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned
and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be
The hazard lights flash twice and the horn beyond the vertical position toward the
aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,
beeps once to indicate all doors are unlock position to remove the key, the
well-lit areas whenever possible.
locked. system may be disarmed when the key
Many devices offering additional protection, such is removed. If the indicator light fails to
● When the button is pushed with
as component locks, identification markers, and glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door
all doors locked, the hazard lights flash
tracking systems, are available at auto supply once and lock it again.
twice and the horn beeps once as a re-
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer minder that the doors are already locked. ● Even when the driver and/or passen-
may also offer such equipment. Check with your
The horn may or may not beep. Refer to gers are in the vehicle, the system will
insurance company to see if you may be eligible
“Silencing the horn beep feature” (vehicles arm with all doors and trunk lid closed
for discounts for various theft protection features. and locked with the ignition key in the
without navigation system) in the “Pre-
How to arm the vehicle security driving check and adjustments” section or OFF position.
system “Vehicle electronic systems” (vehicles with Vehicle security system activation
navigation system) in the “Display screen,
1. Close all windows. (The system can be heater, air conditioner, audio and phone sys- The vehicle security system will give the following
armed even if the windows are open.) tems” section later in this manual. alarm:
2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi- 4. Confirm that the security indicator light ● The headlights blink and the horn sounds
tion and remove the key. comes on. The security light stays on for intermittently.
about 30 seconds. The vehicle security sys- ● The alarm automatically turns off after ap-
3. Close the trunk lid and all doors. Lock all tem is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec-
doors. The doors can be locked with: proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm
onds the vehicle security system automati- reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with
● the power door lock switch (if the door is cally shifts into the armed phase. The again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking
opened, locked and then closed). security light begins to flash once every 3 the driver’s door with the key, a request
seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm switch or by pressing the button on
● the key (mechanical). time period, the driver’s door is unlocked by the Intelligent Key.
● any request switch. the key, a request switch or the Intelligent
Key, or if the ignition key is turned to ACC or
● the Intelligent Key. ON, the system will not arm.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

The alarm is activated by: 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-
position, and wait approximately 10 sec- PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-
● opening the door or trunk lid without using onds. SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD
the key, a request switch or the Intelligent VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-
Key (even if the door is unlocked by using the 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
ATE THE EQUIPMENT.
inside lock knob or the power door lock 4. Restart the engine while holding the device
switch) (which may have caused the interference)
● opening the trunk lid by operating the interior separate from the registered key.
trunk lid release. If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
How to stop an activated alarm rate key ring to avoid interference from other
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s devices.
door with the mechanical key, a request switch or Statement related to Section 15 of FCC
by pressing the button on the Intelligent Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
Key. tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT
ASSY — IMMOBILIZER)
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-
allow the engine to start without the use of a ing two conditions;
registered key.
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-
If the engine fails to start using a registered key terference, and (2) this device must accept
(for example, when interference is caused by any interference received, including inter-
another registered key, an automated toll road ference that may cause undesired opera-
device or automatic payment device on the key tion of the device.
ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
cedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH

If the light still remains on and/or the en-
gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-
vice as soon as possible. Please bring all
keys that you have when visiting your
NISSAN dealer for service.

LIC0994 WIC0854
Security indicator light SWITCH OPERATION
The security indicator light ᭺ is located on the
1 The windshield wiper and washer operates when
instrument panel near the windshield. the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The security indicator light blinks whenever the Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
ignition switch is in the LOCK position with the following speed:
key removed from the ignition switch.
This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Im-
᭺
1 Intermittent — intermittent operation can be
adjusted by turning the knob toward ᭺ A
mobilizer System is operational. (Slower) or ᭺ (Faster). Also, the intermit-
B
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal- tent operation speed varies in accordance
functioning, the light will remain on while the with the vehicle speed. (For example, when
ignition key is in the ON position. the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent
operation speed will be faster.)


06/08/07—debbie ੭

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
NOTE:
CAUTION
You can turn on or turn off the driving ● Do not operate the washer continu-
speed dependent intermittent wiper func- ously for more than 30 seconds.
tion for vehicles with navigation system.
Refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” in the ● Do not operate the washer if the reser-
“Display screen, heater, air conditioner, au- voir tank is empty.
dio and phone systems” section later in this ● Do not fill the window washer reservoir
manual. tank with washer fluid concentrates at
᭺
2 Low — continuous low speed operation full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may
᭺
3 High — continuous high speed operation permanently stain the grille if spilled
Push the lever up ᭺ to have one sweep opera-
4 while filling the window washer reser-
tion of the wiper. voir tank.
Pull the lever toward you ᭺ to operate the
5 ● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with WIC0995
washer. The wiper will also operate several times. water to the manufacturer’s recom- To defrost the rear window glass and outside
mended levels before pouring the fluid mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and
WARNING into the window washer reservoir tank. push the rear window defroster switch on. The
Do not use the window washer reservoir rear window defroster indicator light on the
In freezing temperatures the washer solu- tank to mix the washer fluid concen- switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn
tion may freeze on the windshield and trate and water.
obscure your vision which may lead to an the defroster off.
accident. Warm the windshield with the The rear window defroster automatically turns off
defroster before you wash the windshield. after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or dam-
age the rear window defroster.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH

NOTE: XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so ● The life of xenon headlights will be
equipped) shortened by frequent on-off opera-
The top few rows of wires on the rear win- tion. It is generally desirable not to turn
dow are not part of the rear window de- off the headlights for short intervals
froster system. These wires make up the WARNING
(for example, when the vehicle stops at
antenna for the audio system.
ᏘHIGH VOLTAGE a traffic signal).

● When xenon headlights are on, they ● If the xenon headlight bulb is close to
produce a high voltage. To prevent an burning out, the brightness will drasti-
electric shock, never attempt to modify cally decrease, the light will start blink-
or disassemble. Always have your xe- ing, or the color of the light will be-
non headlights replaced at a NISSAN come reddish. If one or more of the
dealer. above signs appear, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
● Xenon headlights provide considerably
more light than conventional head-
lights. If they are not correctly aimed,
they might temporarily blind an oncom-
ing driver or the driver ahead of you and
cause a serious accident. If headlights
are not aimed correctly, immediately
take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer
and have the headlights adjusted
correctly.
When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its
brightness or color varies slightly. However, the
color and brightness will soon stabilize.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.

LIC0560 LIC0561

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH Autolight system
Lighting The autolight system allows the headlights to be
set so they turn on and off automatically. The
᭺
1 When turning the switch to the posi- autolight system can:
tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights come on. ● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights au-
᭺
2 When turning the switch to the posi- tomatically when it is dark.
tion, the headlights come on and all the other
lights remain on. ● Turn off all the lights when it is light.
● Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after
you turn the key to OFF and all doors are
closed.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

NOTE:
Autolight activation sensitivity and the
time delay for autolight shutoff can be ad-
justed for vehicles with navigation system.
See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the
“Display screen, heater, air conditioner, au-
dio and phone systems” section later in this
manual.
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-
tion ᭺.
1

2. Turn the ignition key to ON.
WIC0996 LIC0562
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off. Be sure you do not put anything on top of Headlight beam select
the autolight sensor ᭺ located in the top
1
Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a side of the instrument panel. The autolight ᭺
1 To select the high beam function, push the
door is opened and left open, the headlights sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov- lever forward. The high beam lights come on
remain ON for 5 minutes. If another door is ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is and the light illuminates.
opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minute dark out and the headlights will illuminate.
timer is reset. If this occurs while parked with the engine ᭺
2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to off and the key in the ON position, your ᭺
3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
the OFF, or position. vehicle’s battery could become discharged. headlight high beams on and off.
Battery saver system
If the ignition switch is turned OFF while the
headlight switch is in the or posi-
tion, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

CAUTION DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
(Canada only) the parking brake is released. The daytime run-
Even though the battery saver feature au- ning lights remain on until the ignition switch is
tomatically turns off the headlights after a The daytime running lights automatically illumi- turned off.
period of time, you should turn the head- nate when the engine is started with the parking
light switch to the OFF position when the brake released. The daytime running lights oper- WARNING
engine is not running to avoid discharging ate with the headlight switch in the OFF, ,
the vehicle battery. When the daytime running light system is
or AUTO position. Turn the headlight switch to active, other lights on your vehicle may
the AUTO or position for headlight illumi- not be on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on
nation when driving at night. your headlights. Failure to do so could
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is cause an accident, injuring yourself and
started, the daytime running lights do not illumi- others.

Headlight switch position
OFF AUTO
Feature
Daytime Dark Daytime Dark Daytime Dark Daytime Dark
Low beam lights On On On On On On On
Tail/running lights Off Automatically on Off Automatically on On On On
Instrument panel
Not adjustable Adjustable Not adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable
lights
Flash-to-pass
Available Available Available Available Available Available Available
feature
High beam lights Not available Available Not available Available Not available Available Available
45 second delay
for headlights off
Not available Not available Available Available Not available Not available Not available
when ignition
switch is OFF


06/08/07—debbie ੭

LIC0392 LIC0563 LIC0393
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS TURN SIGNAL SWITCH FOG LIGHT SWITCH
CONTROL Turn signal To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch
The instrument cluster illuminates when the igni- to the position, then turn the fog light
tion switch is in ON position. ᭺
1 Move the lever up or down to signal the switch to the position.
turning direction. When the turn is com-
The instrument brightness control operates when pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically. To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in
the headlight control switch is in the the AUTO position, the headlights must be on, then
AUTO, or position. Lane change signal turn the fog light switch to the position.
Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru- ᭺
2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up or To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch
ment panel lights when driving at night. down to the point where the indicator light to the OFF position.
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.
The instrument brightness control will not adjust The headlights must be on and the low beams
the brightness when the headlights or parking selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog
lights are off. lights automatically turn off when the high beam
headlights are selected.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.

AIC0102 LIC0394
CORNERING LIGHT Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency condi-
The cornering light provides additional illumina- tions. All turn signal lights flash.
tion toward the turning direction. The cornering
light will illuminate on the turning direction side WARNING
when a turn is signaled with the headlights on.
● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
● Turn signals do not work when the haz-
ard warning flasher lights are on.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

HORN HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

CAUTION
● Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the
seat.
● Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-
ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
may become overheated.
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
LIC0395 WIC0905 ● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
To sound the horn, push the center pad area of should be removed immediately with a
the steering wheel. The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters (if dry cloth.
so equipped). The switch is located on the center
● When cleaning the seat, never use
WARNING console.
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so 1. Start the engine. lar materials.
could affect proper operation of the 2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as ● If any abnormalities are found or the
supplemental front air bag system. Tam- desired. The indicator light in the switch will heated seat does not operate, turn the
pering with the supplemental front air bag illuminate. switch off and have the system checked
system may result in serious personal by your NISSAN dealer.
injury. The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off. ● The battery could run down if the seat
The indicator light will remain on as long as heater is operated while the engine is
the switch is on. not running.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you leave
the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)
equipped) OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

Push the switch again to turn the heated steering
off manually. The indicator light will go off.

NOTE:
If the surface temperature of the steering
wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch
is turned on, the system will not heat the
steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

LIC0421 LIC0451
The heated steering wheel system is designed to The vehicle should be driven with the Traction Con-
operate only when the surface temperature of the trol System (TCS) on for most driving conditions.
steering wheel is below approximately 68°F
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the TCS
(20°C).
reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin.
The heated steering wheel switch is located on The engine speed will be reduced even if the
the front of the console box. accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum
engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm
turn the TCS off.
the steering wheel after the engine starts. The
indicator light will come on. To turn off the TCS, push the TCS OFF switch.
The indicator will come on.
If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is
below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the Push the TCS OFF switch again or restart the
steering wheel to approximately 86°F (30°C), engine to turn ON the system. See “Traction
then turn off automatically. Control System (TCS)” in the “Starting and driv-
ing” section.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
OFF SWITCH (if so equipped) (if so equipped)

The rear sonar system can be disabled by push-
ing the OFF switch. When the system is disabled,
the indicator light on the switch will illuminate.
Push the switch again to enable the system. The
indicator light will go off.
The system will automatically reset the next time
the ignition switch is turned on.
See “Rear sonar system” in the “Starting and
driving” section.

WIC0534 LIC0471
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle
WARNING
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-
ing conditions. The rear sonar system is a convenience
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC but it is not a substitute for proper back-
system reduces the engine output to reduce ing. Always turn and check that it is safe to
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced do so before backing up. Always back up
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If slowly.
maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck The rear sonar system is active when the ignition
vehicle, turn the VDC system off. is in the ON position and the shift selector lever is
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF in R (Reverse).
switch. The indicator will come on.
When sensors detect obstacles within 6 ft (1.8
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is emitted.
engine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dy-
namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and
driving” section.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

POWER OUTLET

● Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
● Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
● When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water to contact the
LIC0997 WIC1010 outlet.
Instrument panel Front center console

The power outlets are for powering electrical CAUTION
accessories such as cellular telephones. They ● The outlet and plug may be hot during
are rated at 12 Volt, 120 W (10A) maximum. or immediately after use.
The power outlet located in the center console is ● The power outlets are not designed for
powered directly by the vehicle battery. The other use with a cigarette lighter.
outlets are powered only when the ignition key is
in the ACC or ON position. ● Do not use with accessories that ex-
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
● Use power outlets with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

STORAGE

LIC0804 LIC0016 WIC0998
MAP POCKETS SEATBACK POCKETS SUNGLASSES HOLDER
The seatback pockets are located on the back of To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.
the driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pockets
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.
can be used to store maps.
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
driving to prevent an accident.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

The plastic cup insert may be removed for clean-
CAUTION
ing.
● Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses. The rear cup holders are located in the fold-down
armrest in the rear seat back.
● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.

WIC1011
Front
CUP HOLDERS
CAUTION
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
To open the front cup holders, push the cup
holder lid. To close, lower the cup holder lid and
push down until it clicks in place.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

LIC0423 LIC0403 LIC0999
Rear GLOVE BOX CONSOLE BOX
To open the cup holders on the rear fold-down
armrest, lift the cup holder lid. To close, lower the Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the Armrest
lid. mechanical key when locking ᭺ or unlocking ᭺
1 2
the glove box. Insert your finger into to the recess ᭺ and slide
1
the armrest forward to the desired position.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

LIC1000 LIC1001 LIC0748
Console box storage COVERED STORAGE BOX GROCERY HOOKS
Pull up on the latch to open the console box. Push the bottom center of the lid to open. The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and
Remove the inside tray to store a large object. can be used to hang a standard size plastic
grocery bag.
The console box may be used for storage of
cellular phones. You can route a cord through the
access notch ᭺ to the power outlet inside the
1 CAUTION
console box. Do not apply a total load of more than 20
lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo
area from moving around while the vehicle is in
motion.

LIC1226 LIC0802

CARGO NETS To install a cargo net, attach the net to the retain-
ers.
WARNING To remove a cargo net, detach the net from the
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or retainers.
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.
● Be sure to secure all four hooks into the
retainers. The cargo restrained in the
net must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) or
the net may not stay secured.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

WINDOWS

POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
● Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
it is in motion and before closing the
windows. Use the window lock switch
to prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls and become
trapped in a window. Unattended chil-
dren could become involved in serious LIC0407 LIC0408
accidents. 1. Power door lock switch Front passenger’s power window
The power windows operate when the ignition 2. Window lock button switch
switch is in the ON position, or for about 45 3. Front passenger’s side automatic
seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the The passenger’s window switch operates only
switch
OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s door the corresponding passenger’s window. To open
4. Right rear passenger’s window switch the window, push the switch and hold it down ᭺.
1
is opened during this period of about 45 sec-
onds, power to the windows is canceled.
5. Left rear passenger’s window switch To close the window, pull the switch up ᭺.2
6. Driver’s side automatic switch
Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close all of the windows.
To open a window, push the switch and hold it
down. To close a window, pull the switch and
hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function
at any time, simply release the switch.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
a window is closed by automatic operation.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window oc-
curs.

WARNING
There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which
LIC0409 LIC0410 cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
Rear power window switch Automatic operation the vehicle before closing the window.
The rear power window switches open or close To fully open a window equipped with automatic If the control unit detects something caught in a
only the corresponding windows. To open the operation, press the window switch down (only window equipped with automatic operation as it
window, push the switch and hold it down ᭺. To
1 driver’s side shown) to the second detent and is closing, the window will be immediately low-
close the window, pull the switch up ᭺.
2
release it; it need not be held. The window auto- ered.
Locking passengers’ windows matically opens all the way. To stop the window,
lift the switch up while the window is opening.
When the window lock button is depressed, only
the driver’s side window can be opened or To fully close a window equipped with automatic
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock operation, pull the switch up to the second detent
function. and release it; it need not be held. To stop the
window, press the switch down while the window
is closing.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

SKYVIEW™ GLASS-PANELED ROOF MOONROOF (if so equipped)

To close the roof, slide the switch to the CLOSE
position ᭺.
2

The position of the sliding roof lid can be chosen
by the position of the sliding switch.
To fully open or close the roof, completely move
the switch to the open or closed position.
Tilting the moonroof
To tilt the moonroof up, push the tilt switch to the
UP position ᭺. When the roof is open, it will
3
automatically close and then tilt up. To tilt the
moonroof down, push the tilt switch to the
LIC0411 WIC0906 DOWN position ᭺. 4

Open or close the SkyView roof shade by sliding AUTOMATIC MOONROOF Restarting the moonroof sliding switch
it from side to side.
The moonroof will only operate when the ignition The sliding switch will become inoperable after
key is in the ON position. The automatic moon- the battery terminal is disconnected, the electri-
roof is operational for about 45 seconds, even if cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormality
the ignition key is turned to the ACC or OFF detected. Use the following reset procedure to
position. If the driver’s door or the front passen- return moonroof operation to normal.
ger’s door is opened during this period of about
1. If the moonroof lid is open, push the tilting
45 seconds, power to the moonroof is canceled.
switch repeatedly toward the DOWN posi-
Sliding the moonroof tion to fully close the lid.

To open the roof, slide the switch to the OPEN 2. Push and hold the tilting switch for more
position ᭺. When the roof is tilted up, it will
1 than 2 seconds toward the DOWN position
automatically tilt down and then open. to reestablish the lid’s home position.
The moonroof should now operate normally.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

Auto reverse function (when closing or If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re- If the moonroof does not close
tilting down the moonroof) peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep
pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the
The auto reverse function can be activated when after it happens; the moonroof will fully close moonroof.
the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto- gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the
matic operation when the ignition key is in the ON moonroof.
position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition
key is turned to the OFF position. WARNING
Depending on the environment or driving ● In an accident you could be thrown from
conditions, the auto reverse function may the vehicle through an open moonroof.
be activated if an impact or load similar to Always use seat belts and child
something being caught in the moonroof restraints.
occurs.
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
WARNING extend any portion of their body out of
the moonroof opening while the vehicle
There are some small distances immedi- is in motion or while the moonroof is
ately before the closed position which closing.
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside CAUTION
the vehicle before closing the moonroof.
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
When closing: from the moonroof before opening.
If the control unit detects something caught in the ● Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof moonroof or surrounding area.
will immediately open backward.
When tilting down:
Sunshade
If the control unit detects something caught in the Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-
moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im- ward or backward.
mediately tilt up.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

INTERIOR LIGHT PERSONAL LIGHTS

– Driver’s door is opened.
Lights remain on for a maximum of 30
seconds after driver’s door is closed.
– Ignition key is removed from key cylinder.
seconds.
The lights will go off when the ignition key is in the
ON position, or the driver’s door is closed and
locked.
The lights will also go off after 30 minutes when
doors are open.
● When the switch is in the OFF position ᭺, 3
LIC0907 the interior light does not illuminate, regard- LIC0908
less of door position.
FRONT
The interior light has a three-position switch and
operates regardless of ignition switch position. NOTE: To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To
The footwell and doorstep lights illuminate turn them off, press the switches again.
● When the switch is in the ON position ᭺, 1
the interior light illuminates, regardless of when the driver and passenger doors are
opened regardless of the interior light CAUTION
door position. The light will go off after 30
minutes unless the ignition key is in the ACC switch position. These lights will turn off Do not use for extended periods of time
or ON position. automatically after 30 minutes while doors with the engine stopped. This could result
are open to prevent the battery from be- in a discharged battery.
● When the switch is in the center DOOR po- coming discharged.
sition ᭺, the front and rear personal lights will
2
illuminate under the following conditions: CAUTION
– Driver’s door is unlocked while the igni-
Do not use for extended periods of time
tion key is removed from the key cylinder.
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
seconds.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

TRUNK LIGHT

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.
When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.
The light will go off after about 30 minutes if the
trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch is
in the ACC or ON position.
For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exte-
rior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

LIC0909 LIC0417
Console light REAR
The console light ᭺ will turn on whenever the
1 To turn on both personal reading lights, press the
parking lights or headlights are illuminated. switch to the position ᭺. To turn the lights
1
off, return the switch to the center position.
The console light brightness can be adjusted
with the illumination brightness control. To turn on a single personal reading light, press
the switch to the position ᭺. To turn a
2
single personal reading light off, return the switch
to the center position.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

HOMELINKா UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver provides a
WARNING
convenient way to consolidate the functions of up
to three individual hand-held transmitters into ● Do not use the HomeLinkா Universal
one built-in device. Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and re-
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver: verse features as required by federal
● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) safety standards. (These standards be-
devices such as garage doors, gates, home came effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-
and office lighting, entry door locks and se-
rage door opener which cannot detect
curity systems.
an object in the path of a closing garage
● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No door and then automatically stop and
separate batteries are required. If the vehi- reverse, does not meet current federal
cle’s battery is discharged or is discon- safety standards. Using a garage door
nected, HomeLinkா will retain all program- opener without these features in- WIC0986
ming. creases the risk of serious injury or
death. PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா
Once the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver 1. To begin, press and hold the two outer
● During the programming procedure
is programmed, retain the original trans- HomeLinkா buttons (to clear the memory)
your garage door or security gate will
mitter for future programming procedures
open and close (if the transmitter is until the indicator light ᭺ blinks (after 20
1
(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon within range). Make sure that people or seconds). Release both buttons.
sale of the vehicle, the programmed objects are clear of the garage door,
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver buttons 2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter
gate, etc. that you are programming. 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
should be erased for security purposes. For
● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned HomeLinkா surface.
additional information refer to “Program-
ming HomeLinkா” later in this section. off while programming the HomeLinkா
Universal Transceiver.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator NOTE:
light on the HomeLinkா flashes, changing
Once you have pressed and released the
from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing program button on the garage door open-
blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds. er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you
When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.
buttons may be released. The rapidly flash- Use the help of a second person for conve-
ing light indicates successful programming. nience to assist when performing this step.
To activate the garage door or other pro-
grammed device, press and hold the pro- 7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-
grammed HomeLinkா button — releasing ing the garage door opener program button,
quickly and firmly press and release the
when the device begins to activate.
HomeLinkா button you’ve just programmed.
5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkா blinks Press and release the HomeLinkா button up
rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid, to 3 times to complete the training.
WIC0987 HomeLinkா has picked up a “rolling code” 8. Your HomeLinkா button should now be pro-
3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and garage door opener signal. You will need to grammed. (To program the remaining
hold both the HomeLinkா button you want to proceed with the next steps to train the HomeLinkா buttons for additional door or
program and the hand-held transmitter but- HomeLinkா to complete the programming gate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)
ton. which may require a ladder and another per-
son for convenience. NOTE:
DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has
been completed. 6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro- Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to
gram button located on the garage door “clear” all previously programmed
opener’s motor to activate the “training HomeLinkா buttons.
mode”. This button is usually located near If you have any questions or are having difficulty
the antenna wire that hangs down from the programming your HomeLinkா buttons, refer to
motor. If the wire originates from under a the HomeLinkா web site at: www.homelink.com
light lens, you will need to remove the lens to or call 1-800-355-3515.
access the program button.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா FOR PROGRAMMING TROUBLE- CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand- If the HomeLinkா does not quickly learn the hand- Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,
held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec- held transmitter information: to clear all programming, press and hold the two
onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to outside buttons and release when the indicator
● replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
HomeLinkா, continue to press and hold the light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).
with new batteries.
HomeLinkா button (note steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-
gramming HomeLinkா”) while you press and re- ● position the hand-held transmitter with its REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every battery area facing away from the HOMELINKா BUTTON
2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly HomeLinkா surface. To reprogram a HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver
(indicating successful programming).
● press and hold both the HomeLinkா and button, complete the following.
NOTE: hand-held transmitter buttons without inter- 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkா but-
ruption. ton. Do not release the button until step 4
When programming a garage door opener,
● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 has been completed.
etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-
ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos- inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the 2. When the indicator light begins to flash
sible damage to the garage door opener HomeLinkா surface. Hold the transmitter in slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
components. that position for up to 15 seconds. If hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76
HomeLinkா is not programmed within that mm) away from the HomeLinkா surface.
OPERATING THE HOMELINKா time, try holding the transmitter in another
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER position – keeping the indicator light in view 3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter
at all times. button.
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver (once pro-
grammed) may now be used to activate the ga- If you continue to have programming difficulties, 4. The HomeLinkா indicator light will flash, first
rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap- please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator
propriate programmed HomeLinkா Universal Department. The phone numbers are located in light begins to flash rapidly, release both
Transceiver button. The red indicator light will the Foreword of this manual. buttons.
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver button has This transmitter has been tested and com-
now been reprogrammed. The new device can plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
be activated by pushing the HomeLinkா button Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
that was just programmed. This procedure will proved by the party responsible for compli-
not affect any other programmed HomeLinkா ance could void the user’s authority to op-
buttons. erate the equipment.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN DOC: ISTC 1763K1313
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the FCC I.D. CV2V67690
codes of any non-rolling code device that has
been programmed into HomeLinkா. Consult the
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-
facturer or dealer of those devices for additional
information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLinkா Univer-
sal Transceiver with your new transmitter
information.
FCC Notice:
This device complies with FCC rules part 15
and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-
tion is subject to the following two condi-
tions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-
terference and (2) This device must accept
any interference that may be received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Intelligent Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Trunk lid release switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system keys . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Tilting telescopic steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Automatic operation (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Intelligent Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
How to use the remote keyless entry Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Warning lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

06/08/07—debbie ੭

KEYS

the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle ● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the extended period in an area where tem-
registration process requires erasing all memory peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
in the Intelligent Key components when register-
ing new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys ● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
that you have to the NISSAN dealer. key holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
equipment that produces a magnetic
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose personal computers.
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by
using the key number. NISSAN does not record
key numbers so it is very important to keep track
of your key number plate.
WPD0363
A key number is only necessary when you have
1. Two Intelligent Keys lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
2. Mechanical keys with built-in transpon- from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer
der chip (inside Intelligent Keys) can duplicate it.
3. Key number plate
INTELLIGENT KEYS CAUTION
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent contains electrical components, to
Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel- come into contact with water or salt
ligent Key system components and NISSAN Ve- water. This could affect the system
hicle Immobilizer System components. function.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle. ● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered ● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be against another object.
registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

06/08/07—debbie ੭

CAUTION NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
Always carry the mechanical key installed
SYSTEM KEYS
in the Intelligent Key slot. You can only drive your vehicle using the master
keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle
Valet hand-off Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.
When you have to leave a key with a valet, give These keys have a transponder chip in the key
them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me- head.
chanical key with you to protect your belongings.
The master key can be used for all the locks.
To prevent the glove box and the trunk from being
opened during valet hand-off, follow the proce- To protect belongings when you leave a key with
dures below. someone, give them the Intelligent Key only, not
the mechanical key.
1. Push the trunk cancel switch to the OFF
SPA1951 position. Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Mechanical key 2. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli- Additional or replacement keys:
gent Key. If you still have a key, the key number is not
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key,
which can be used in case of a discharged bat- 3. Lock the glove box and the trunk pass- necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
tery. through with the mechanical key. Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-
cate your existing key. As many as four NISSAN
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock 4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used
knob on the back of the Intelligent Key. keep the mechanical key with you.
with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into See “Trunk lid” later in this section, “Storage” in Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the “Instruments and controls” section and your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-
the lock position. “Seats” in the “Safety — seats, seat belts and cause the registration process will erase the
supplemental restraint system” section. memory of all key codes previously registered
The mechanical key can be used for operation in into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.
the same way as an ordinary key. After the registration process, these components
will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

06/08/07—debbie ੭

DOORS

Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time
WARNING
of registration will no longer be able to start your
vehicle. ● Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat belts,
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which this provides greater safety in the event
contains an electrical transponder, to come into of an accident by helping to prevent
contact with salt water. This could affect system persons from being thrown from the
function. vehicle. This also helps keep children
and others from unintentionally open-
ing the doors, and will help keep out
intruders.
● Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
● Do not leave children unattended inside LPD0181
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- Driver’s side
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri- LOCKING WITH KEY
ous accidents. The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors at the same time.
Turning the key toward the front ᭺ of the vehicle
1
locks all doors.
Turning the key one time toward the rear ᭺ of the
2
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,
returning the key to neutral ᭺ (where the key can
3
only be removed and inserted) and turning it
toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks
all doors ᭺.
4


06/08/07—debbie ੭

Opening and closing windows
The driver’s door key operation allows you to
open and close windows equipped with auto-
matic operation at the same time.
● To open the windows, turn the driver’s door
key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is unlocked.
● To close the windows, turn the driver’s door
key to the front of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is locked.
Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.
WPD0291 WPD0381
Inside lock LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK LOCK SWITCH
KNOB
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
To lock the door without the key, move the inside lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side), to
lock knob to the lock position ᭺, then close the
1 the lock position ᭺. When locking the door this
1
door. way, be certain not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.
To unlock the door without the key, move the
inside lock knob to the unlock position ᭺.
2 To unlock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
side) to the unlock position ᭺.
2


06/08/07—debbie ੭

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

Lockout protection WARNING
When the power door lock switch (driver’s or Radio waves could adversely affect elec-
front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock tric medical equipment. Those who use a
position with the key in the ignition and any door pacemaker should contact the electric
open, all doors will lock and then unlock auto- medical equipment manufacturer for the
matically. This helps to prevent the keys from possible influences before use.
being accidently locked inside the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the
door locks using the remote controller function or
pushing the request switch on the vehicle without
taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The
operating environment and/or conditions may af-
fect the Intelligent Key system operation.
APD1010 Be sure to read the following before using the
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK Intelligent Key system.
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors CAUTION
from being opened accidentally, especially when
small children are in the vehicle. ● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors. ● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
When the lever is in the lock position, the
door can be opened only from the outside. The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-
ligent Key system transmits weak radio waves.
Environmental conditions may interfere with the
operation of the Intelligent Key system under the
following operating conditions.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

● When operating near a location where Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving ● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as radio waves, if the key is left near equipment extended period in an area where tem-
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig- peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
station. nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-
tery life may become shorter. ● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
● When in possession of wireless equipment, key holder that contains a magnet.
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, For information regarding replacement of a bat-
and CB radio. ● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
tery, see “Battery” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
equipment that produces a magnetic
● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or yourself” section. field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
covered by metallic materials. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered personal computers.
● When any type of radio wave remote control and used with one vehicle. For information about If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
is used nearby. the purchase and use of additional Intelligent recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer. gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the
● When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal com- unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate
CAUTION the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing
puter.
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.
● When the vehicle is parked near a parking contains electrical components, to
meter. come into contact with water or salt
In such cases, correct the operating conditions water. This could affect the system
before using the Intelligent Key function or use function.
the mechanical key. ● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending ● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is against another object.
approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-
charged, replace it with a new one. ● Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-
ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blink ● Wetting may damage the Intelligent
green for about 30 seconds after the ignition Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
switch is turned to the ON position. mediately wipe until it is completely dry.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

SPA2038 WPD0375

OPERATING RANGE If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
handle or rear bumper, the request switches may PRECAUTION
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used not function.
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified ● Do not push the door handle request switch
operating range from the request switch ᭺.
1 When the Intelligent Key is within the operating with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone illustrated. The close distance to the door
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
strong radio waves are present near the operat- request switch to lock/unlock the doors. to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-
ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat- gent Key is outside the vehicle.
ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent
Key may not function properly. ● After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm) by testing them.
from each request switch ᭺.
1
● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
key with you and then lock the doors.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

● Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.

WPD0376 WPD0377
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION Locking doors
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
the key out of your pocket or bag. tion. (Remove the key if any key is in the
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you ignition switch.)
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door 2. Close all doors.
handle request switch within the range of opera-
tion. 3. Push any door handle request switch ᭺ 1
while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
4. All doors and the trunk will lock.
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the outside buzzer sounds twice.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

● Doors do not lock with the door handle inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;
request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the lock will automatically unlock and the door
the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you. buzzer sounds.
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside
the vehicle, doors can be locked with an- NOTE:
other Intelligent Key. The doors may not lock when the intelli-
gent key is in the same hand that is oper-
CAUTION ating the request switch to lock the door.
● After locking the doors using the re- Put the intelligent key in a purse, pocket or
quest switch, make sure that the doors your other hand.
have been securely locked by operating
the door handles or the trunk opener CAUTION
switch. The lockout protection may not function
WPD0369 ● When locking the doors using the re- under the following conditions:
NOTE: quest switch, make sure to have the ● When the Intelligent Key is placed on
Intelligent Key in your possession be- top of the instrument panel.
● Doors lock with the door handle request fore operating the request switch to
switch while a mechanical key is in the igni- prevent the Intelligent Key from being ● When the Intelligent Key is placed on
tion switch or the ignition switch is pushed left in the vehicle. top of the rear parcel shelf.
in. ● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
● The request switch is operational only
● Doors lock with the door handle request when the Intelligent Key has been de- side the glove box or a storage bin.
switch while the ignition switch is not in the tected by the Intelligent Key system. ● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
LOCK position. Lockout protection side the door pockets.
● Doors do not lock by pushing the door ● When the Intelligent Key is placed on or
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-
handle request switch while any door is under the spare tire area.
dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection
open. However, doors lock with the me- is equipped with the Intelligent Key system. ● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
chanical key even if any door is open. side or near metallic materials.
When the driver’s side door is open, the doors
are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put

06/08/07—debbie ੭

● Turning the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
● Locking the doors with the remote controller.
● Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.

WPD0377 WPD0369

Unlocking doors All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
1. Carry the Intelligent Key. minute after pushing the request switch.
2. Push the door handle request switch ᭺.
1
● Opening any door.
3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the ● Pushing the ignition switch.
outside buzzer sounds once.
● Inserting the mechanical key into the ignition
4. Push the door handle request switch ᭺ 1
switch.
again within 1 minute to unlock all doors.
The interior light timer illuminates for 30 seconds
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the
when a door is unlocked and the room light
doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning
switch is in the DOOR position.
the door handle to its original position will unlock
the door. If the door does not unlock after return- The interior light can be turned off without waiting
ing the door handle, push the door handle re- for 30 seconds by performing one of the follow-
quest switch to unlock the door. ing operations.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is
closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk,
the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will
open.
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all
door locks using the remote keyless function of
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away
from the vehicle. The operating distance de-
pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.
LPD0378 The remote keyless entry function will not func- WPD0359
tion under the following conditions:
Opening the trunk lid Locking doors
● When the Intelligent Key is not within the
1. Push the trunk opener request switch ᭺ for
A operational range. 1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
more than 1 second while carrying the Intel- tion.
ligent Key with you. ● When the doors or the trunk are open or not
closed securely. 2. Close all doors.
2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound
● When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- 3. Push the button on the Intelligent
four times.
charged. Key.
3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
CAUTION
Lockout protection the horn beeps once.
When locking the doors using the Intelli-
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci- gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in 5. All doors will be locked.
dentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is the vehicle.
equipped with the Intelligent Key system.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

The interior light illuminates for 30 seconds when
CAUTION
a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in
After locking the doors using the Intelli- the DOOR position.
gent Key, be sure that the doors have been
securely locked by operating the door The light can be turned off without waiting for 30
handles. seconds by performing one of the following op-
erations.
● Turning the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
● Locking the doors with the remote controller.
● Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.

WPD0360
Opening windows
Unlocking doors The Intelligent Key allows you to open windows
equipped with automatic operation simulta-
1. Push the button on the Intelligent Key. neously.
2. The hazard warning lights flash once. ● To open the windows, press the but-
3. Push the button again within 1 minute ton on the Intelligent Key for longer than 3
to unlock all doors. seconds after all doors are unlocked.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one The door windows will open while pressing
of the following operations is performed within 1 the button on the Intelligent Key.
minute after pushing the button. The door windows cannot be closed by
● Opening any doors. using the Intelligent Key.

● Pushing the ignition switch.
● Inserting the mechanical key into the ignition
switch.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

WPD0364 WPD0361 WPD0362
Releasing the trunk lid Using the panic alarm Silencing the horn beep feature
Push the button for longer than 0.5 sec- If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-
ond to open the trunk lid. The trunk release button you may activate the panic alarm to call attention vated using the Intelligent Key.
will not operate when the ignition switch is in the by pushing and holding the button on the
ON position or when the trunk cancel switch is in Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 second. NOTE:
the OFF position. See “Cancel switch” in the
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 If you change the horn beep and lamp flash
“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.
seconds. feature with the keyfob, the display screen
(if so equipped) will not show the current
The panic alarm stops when: mode and cannot be used to change the
● it has run for 25 seconds, or mode. Use the keyfob to return to the pre-
vious mode and re-enable the display
● any button is pushed on the Intelligent Key. screen control.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

To deactivate: Press and hold the
CAUTION
and buttons for at least 2 seconds.
When the buzzer sounds and the warning
The hazard warning lights will flash three times to light illuminates, be sure to check both
confirm that the horn beep feature has been the vehicle and the Intelligent Key.
deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the WARNING SIGNALS
and buttons for at least 2 seconds To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-
once more.
pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and
beep feature has been reactivated. outside the vehicle and a warning light comes on
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si- in the instrument panel.
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered. WPD0380 When a chime or beep sounds or the warning
᭺
1 P (Park) position selecting warning light comes on, be sure to check the vehicle and
the Intelligent Key.
light
᭺
2 Intelligent Key system warning light Audible reminder and warning when
WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE locking the doors
REMINDERS When the chime or buzzer sounds from inside
The Intelligent Key system is equipped with a and outside the vehicle, check for the following:
function that is designed to minimize improper ● The ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
operations and to help prevent the vehicle from position.
being stolen. The warning buzzer sounds and the
warning light illuminates when improper opera- ● The Intelligent Key is not left inside the ve-
tions are detected. hicle.
● The selector lever is in the P (Park) position.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

Audible reminder and warning when ● The warning chime may stop when one of NISSAN recommends replacing the battery at a
the engine stops the following is performed: NISSAN dealer.

When the P position selecting warning light – Returning the ignition switch to the LOCK Preventing the Intelligent Key from
( ) in the instrument panel blinks in red: position. being left in the vehicle
● Make sure the selector lever is in the P – Removing the mechanical key. If you lock all doors using the power door lock
position. – Closing the doors. switch with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle, all of
the doors unlock immediately and the buzzer will
When the chime sounds intermittently: Alarm and warning when the engine warn you when the door is closed.
● Make sure the selector lever is in the P starts
position and the ignition switch is turned to
When the Intelligent Key system warning light
the LOCK position.
( ) blinks red and the outside buzzer
If the chime sounds continuously when the driv- sounds, make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the
er’s door is opened, check the following: vehicle.
● The selector lever is in the P position and the Warning for low battery power
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi-
tion. When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-
ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blink
● The mechanical key is not inserted into the green for about 30 seconds after the ignition
ignition switch. switch is turned to the ON position. This warning
is to let you know that the battery of the Intelligent
Key will run down soon. Replace it with a new
one. Refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.


06/09/07—cathy ੭

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
When pushing the door handle The front door beep sounds for approximately 2 Take out the Intelligent Key from the vehicle and
The doors cannot be locked.
request switch seconds. push the door handle request switch.
The front door beep sounds for approximately 10 The ignition knob is not turned to LOCK Turn the ignition knob to LOCK.
seconds. position.
The key warning light in the instrument panel The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
When closing the doors blinks in red and the front door warning beep
sounds for approximately 3 seconds.
The front door beep sounds for approximately 3 The Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle. Take out the Intelligent Key from the vehicle and
seconds and all doors unlock. close the door.
The ignition knob is not in LOCK Turn the ignition knob to LOCK.
When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously. position, or the mechanical key is in-
serted into the ignition knob. Remove the mechanical key from the ignition knob.

When stopping the engine The P position warning light in the instrument The selector lever is not in the P (Park) Make sure that the selector lever is in the P (Park)
panel blinks in red. position. position and turn the ignition knob to LOCK.
When turning the ignition knob The warning chime sounds The ignition knob is not turned to LOCK. Turn the ignition knob to LOCK.
When starting the engine The key warning light in the instrument panel The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one. See “Battery
blinks in green. replacement” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.
When turning the ignition A warning chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is not turned to the Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
switch LOCK position.
A warning chime sounds continuously and the
Intelligent Key lock warning light blinks.
When pushing the ignition The Intelligent Key system warning light in the The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. If the Intelligent Key system warning light illuminates
switch instrument panel illuminates red. red even while you are carrying the Intelligent Key,
the battery is completely discharged. Replace the
battery with a new one. See “Battery replacement” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

HOOD TRUNK LID

WARNING
● Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-
haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
● Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
WPD0365 access to car keys.
᭺
1 Pull the hood lock release handle located WARNING
below the driver side instrument panel. The
hood will spring up slightly. ● Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving. Fail-
᭺
2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to the ure to do so could cause the hood to fly
side as illustrated with your fingertips and open and result in an accident.
raise the hood.
● If you see steam or smoke coming from
When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make the engine compartment, to avoid injury
sure it locks into place. do not open the hood.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

LPD0185 LPD0186 LPD0187
Driver’s side Cancel switch INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH
When the cancel switch located inside the glove
The trunk lid release switch is located below the box is OFF, the trunk lid cannot be opened with WARNING
armrest of the driver’s door trim panel. To open the trunk lid release switch or with the Intelligent Closely supervise children when they are
the trunk lid, pull the trunk lid release switch. Key. around cars to prevent them from playing
To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid and becoming locked in the trunk where
down securely. they could be seriously injured. Keep the
car locked, with the rear seatback and
You can open the trunk lid with Intelligent Key. trunk lid securely latched when not in use,
Refer to “Intelligent Key system” earlier in this and prevent children’s access to car keys.
section.
The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides
a means of escape for children and adults in the
event they become locked inside the trunk.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi-
nated release handle until the lock releases and
push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is
made of a material that glows in the dark after a
brief exposure to ambient light.
The handle is located inside the trunk compart-
ment on the interior of the trunk lid.

LPD0188 LPD0189
OPENER OPERATION FUEL-FILLER CAP
The fuel-filler door release is located on the driv- The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the
er’s door. To open the fuel-filler door, push the cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn
release. To lock, close the fuel-filler door se- the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are
curely. heard.
Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder ᭺ while
1
refueling.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

WARNING ● Do not fill a portable fuel container in CAUTION
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and can cause an explosion of flammable ● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
highly explosive under certain condi- liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or flush it away with water to avoid paint
tions. You could be burned or seriously trailer. To reduce the risk of serious damage.
injured if it is misused or mishandled. injury or death when filling portable fuel ● Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.
Always stop the engine and do not containers: Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
smoke or allow open flames or sparks
near the vehicle when refueling. – Always place the container on the properly may cause the Mal-
ground when filling. function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off – Do not use electronic devices when nate. If the light illuminates be-
automatically. Continued refueling may filling. cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel – Keep the pump nozzle in contact missing, tighten or install the cap and
spray and possibly a fire. with the container while you are fill- continue to drive the vehicle.
● Use only an original equipment type ing it. The light should turn off after a
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a – Use only approved portable fuel con-
built-in safety valve needed for proper few driving trips. If the light
tainers for flammable liquid.
operation of the fuel system and emis- does not turn off after a few driving
sion control system. An incorrect cap trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
can result in a serious malfunction and NISSAN dealer.
possible injury. It could also cause the
● For additional information, see the
malfunction indicator light to come on.
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to the “Instruments and Controls” section
attempt to start your vehicle. earlier in this manual.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

TILTING TELESCOPIC STEERING
COLUMN

WARNING Entry/Exit function
Do not adjust the steering wheel while The automatic drive positioner system will make
driving. You could lose control of your the steering wheel move up automatically when
vehicle and cause an accident. the driver’s door is opened and the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position. This lets the driver
CAUTION get into and out of the seat more easily. The
steering wheel moves back into position when
Do not adjust the steering wheel any the driver’s door is closed and the ignition switch
closer to you than is necessary for proper is pushed.
steering operation and comfort. The driv-
er’s air bag inflates with great force. If you For more information, see “Automatic drive posi-
are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting tioner” later in this section.
sideways or out of position in any way, you Telescopic operation
are at greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or WPD0366 Push the switch ᭺ to adjust the steering wheel
1
fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if so forward or backward ᭺ to the desired position.
3
against it when it inflates. Always sit back equipped)
against the seatback and as far away as
practical from the steering wheel. Always Tilt operation
use the seat belts.
Push the switch ᭺ to adjust the steering wheel
1
up or down ᭺ to the desired position.
2


06/08/07—debbie ੭

SUN VISORS

Telescopic operation
Push the lock lever ᭺ down and adjust the
3
steering wheel forward or backward ᭺ to the
4
desired position.
Pull the lock lever up firmly to lock the steering
wheel in place.

WPD0367
MANUAL OPERATION
Tilt operation
Pull the lock lever ᭺ forward and adjust the
1
steering wheel up or down ᭺ to the desired
2
position.
Push the lock lever back to lock the steering
wheel in place.

WPD0297


06/08/07—debbie ੭

MIRRORS

᭺
1 To block glare from the front, swing down the
main sun visor.
᭺
2 To block glare from the side, remove the
main sun visor from the center mount and
swing the visor to the side.
᭺
3 Slide the extension sun visor in or out as
needed.

CAUTION
● Do not store the sun visor before return-
ing the extension to its original
position.
● Do not pull the extension sun visor forc- WPD0324 WPD0332
edly downward. Without compass
VANITY MIRRORS
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
down and flip open the mirror cover. The vanity REARVIEW MIRROR
mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-
open.
cally dims according to the intensity of the head-
lights of the vehicle following you. The automatic
anti-glare feature operates only when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
The indicator light ᭺ will illuminate when the
1
automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:
● the O button for inside mirrors without
compass.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

Some vehicles are also equipped with automatic
anti-glare outside mirrors. For additional informa-
tion, see “Automatic anti-glare outside mirrors”
later in this section.
For information on HomeLinkா Universal Trans-
ceiver operation, see the “HomeLinkா Universal
Transceiver” in the “Instrument and controls” sec-
tion of this manual.
For information on the compass display (if so
equipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section of this manual.

NOTE:
WPD0333 LPD0237
Do not hang any objects over the sensors
With compass ᭺ or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.
2 OUTSIDE MIRRORS
● the button for inside mirrors with Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the
compass. sensors, resulting in improper operation. The outside mirror remote control will operate
only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
The indicator light will turn off. position.
To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again, Move the small switch ᭺ to select the right or left
1
press: mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position
● the | button for inside mirrors without using the large switch ᭺.2
compass.
● the button for inside mirrors with
compass.
The indicator light will turn on.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

● the button on rearview mirrors with
WARNING
compass.
● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they The indicator light will turn off.
appear. Be careful when moving to the To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,
right. Using only this mirror could cause press:
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly ● the | button on rearview mirrors without
judge distances to other objects. compass.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. ● the button on rearview mirrors
You could lose control of your vehicle equipped with compass.
and cause an accident. The indicator light will turn on.
Automatic anti-glare outside mirrors (if For information on the automatic anti-glare rear-
so equipped) view mirror, see “Automatic anti-glare rearview MPA0008
mirror” earlier in this section.
The outside mirrors will automatically dim during
Manual folding outside mirrors (if so
nighttime conditions to reduce the glare from the equipped)
headlights of trailing vehicles. The automatic anti- Push the mirrors backward to fold them.
glare feature operates only when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
The automatic anti-glare feature will be on when
starting the vehicle. The indicator light on the
automatic anti-glare rearview mirror will illuminate
when the automatic anti-glare feature is on.
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:
● the O button on rearview mirrors without
compass.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

Reverse tilt-down feature (if so NOTE:
equipped) If the outside mirror control switch is in the
neutral position, neither mirror will turn
The reverse tilt-down feature will turn the se-
downward when the shift selector lever is
lected outside mirror surface downward to pro- moved to R (Reverse).
vide better rear visibility close to the vehicle.
For more information regarding this feature and
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, how to save the R (Reverse) mirror tilt-down
turn the outside mirror control switch to the left or adjustment in the automatic drive positioner
right position. Only one mirror can be selected at memory, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” later
a time. in this section.
Move the shift selector lever to R (Reverse). The Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
selected mirror will turn downward.
The electric control type outside mirrors (if so
LPD0196 The selected mirror surface will return to its origi- equipped) can be heated to defrost, defog, or
nal position when any of the following have oc- de-ice for improved visibility. Press the rear win-
Power folding outside mirrors (if so curred: dow defogger switch to activate the heating
equipped) function. Press the switch again to deactivate, or
● The shift selector lever is moved to any po-
the heating function will automatically turn off
CAUTION sition other than R (Reverse).
after approximately 15 minutes.
Do not manually fold the power folding ● The outside mirror control switch is set to the
mirrors. Manually folding the mirrors can N (Neutral) position.
damage the mirrors.
● The ignition switch is turned OFF.
Press the switch to open or close the mirrors.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if
so equipped)

The automatic drive positioner system has two 3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column,
features: and outside mirrors to the desired positions
● Memory storage function by manually operating each adjusting
switch. For additional information, see
● Entry/exit function “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section and
“Pedal position adjustment” and “Outside
mirrors” earlier in this section.
During this step, do not turn the ignition to
any position other than ON.
4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,
push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at
least 1 second.
LPD0197

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION The indicator light for the pushed memory
switch will come on and stay on for approxi-
Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering col- mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.
umn, and outside mirrors can be stored in the After the indicator light goes off, the se-
automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these lected positions are stored in the selected
procedures to use the memory system. memory (1 or 2).
1. Set the Continuously Variable Transmission If a new memory is stored in the same memory
(CVT) selector lever to the P (Park) position. switch, the previous memory will be deleted.
2. Turn the ignition ON. Linking a keyfob to a stored memory
position
Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory
position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow-
ing procedure.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi- 3. Push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for at Confirming memory storage
tion. least 1 second to operate the automatic
drive positioner. ● Turn the ignition ON and push the SET
2. While the indicator light for the memory switch. If the main memory has not been
switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec- 4. Turn the outside mirror control switch to L stored, the indicator light will come on for
onds, press the button on the keyfob. (left). approximately 0.5 seconds. When the
The indicator light will blink. After the indica- memory has stored the position, the indica-
5. Depress the brake pedal.
tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to that tor light will stay on for approximately 5 sec-
memory setting. 6. Move the CVT selector lever to R (Reverse). onds.
With the key removed from the ignition switch, 7. Adjust the mirror to the desired viewing po- ● If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
press the button on the keyfob. The driv- sition for backing up by operating the out- fuse opens, the memory storage function will
er’s seat and outside mirrors will move to the side mirror control switch.
be canceled and must be restarted before a
memorized position. 8. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, stored memory position can be set again.
push the memory switch 1 or 2 selected in Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to
NOTE: step 3 fully for at least 1 second. restart the memory storage function. You
If a new memory position is saved to the ● The indicator light for the pushed memory can also restart the memory storage function
memory switch, the keyfob automatically switch will come on and stay on for approxi- using the following procedure.
re-links. mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch. 1. Connect the battery cable or replace the
After the indicator light goes off, the se- fuse.
Procedure for storing the outside lected mirror position is stored in the se-
mirror positions for best visibility when lected memory (1 or 2). 2. Open and close the driver’s door more than
backing up two times with the ignition key in the LOCK
9. Turn the outside mirror control switch to R
position.
An outside mirror position for backing up can be (right). Repeat the above procedure to ad-
stored for each memory switch (1 and 2). just the right mirror position and store in the Once the memory storage function has been
selected memory. restarted, you can store a memory position.
1. Set the parking brake. See “Memory storage function” earlier in this
● When the driver’s seat, accelerator and
2. Turn the ignition ON. (Do not start the en- brake pedals, and outside mirrors are not in section.
gine.) the memorized position, the outside mirror
will move with the initial tilt-down angle.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

Selecting the memorized position The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return to ● When any of the memory switches are
previous position when the driver’s door is closed pushed while the automatic drive positioner
Set the CVT selector lever to the P (Park) posi- and the ignition switch is pushed is operating.
tion, then:
The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can- ● When the adjusting switch for the driver’s
● Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’s celed. See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the seat is turned on while the automatic drive
door, push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio positioner is operating.
for at least 1 second, or and phone systems” section of this manual. ● When the memory switch (1 or 2) is not
● Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Restarting the entry/exit function pushed and held for at least 1 second.
and push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for ● When the seat has been already moved to
at least 1 second. If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
the memorized position.
opens, the entry/exit function will be disabled.
The driver’s seat, steering column, and outside Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to ● When no seat position is stored in the
mirrors will move to the memorized position with restart the entry/exit function. You can also restart memory switch.
the indicator light blinking, and then the light will the entry/exit function using the following proce-
stay on for approximately 5 seconds. dure. ● When the CVT selector lever is moved from
P (Park) to any other position.
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION 1. Connect the battery cable or replace the
● When the driver’s door remains open more
fuse.
This system is designed so that the driver’s seat than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is
and automatic operation steering column (if so 2. Open and close the driver’s door more than not in the ON position.
equipped) will automatically move when the CVT two times with the ignition key in the LOCK
position. The automatic drive positioner system can be
selector lever is in the P (Park) position. This adjusted and canceled for vehicles with naviga-
allows the driver to get into and out of the driver’s The entry/exit function should now work properly. tion system. See “Vehicle electronic systems” in
seat more easily. the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio
SYSTEM OPERATION and phone systems” section of this manual.
The driver’s seat will slide backward and the
steering wheel will move up when the driver’s The automatic drive positioner system will not
door is opened and the ignition switch is in the work or will stop operating under the following
LOCK position. conditions:
● When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7
km/h).

06/08/07—debbie ੭

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner,
audio and phone systems

Control panel buttons — with monochrome screen . . . . 4-2 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
How to use the TRIP INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-22
How to use the AUDIO button Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
(for control panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
Door warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Control panel buttons — with navigation system. . . . . . . 4-6 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
CD changer (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
How to use the joystick and ENTER button . . . . . . . . 4-6
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Setting up the start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
How to use the TRIP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

06/08/07—debbie ੭

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITH
MONOCHROME SCREEN

WARNING
● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-
tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, or electrical shock.
● Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
● In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from
it, stop using the system immediately
and contact your nearest NISSAN
dealer. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock.

WHA1077

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

06/08/07—debbie ੭

1. TRIP INFO button (P. 4-3) ● When driving uphill or rounding curves, the
2. CLOCK DISP button (P. 4-5) fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily
3. AUDIO button (P. 4-5) change the display.
When you use this system, make sure the engine
is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will use up all the battery power,
and the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
TRIP INFO button — This is a button on the
control panel. By pressing this button you can
select the item or perform this action. WHA0701

HOW TO USE THE TRIP INFO Distance to empty (MI or km)
BUTTON The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides you
When the TRIP INFO button is pressed, the with an estimation of the distance that can be
following modes will display on the screen. driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly
calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel
Dist. to Empty → Average Speed → Fuel
tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display
Economy → Trip Time → Audio → Dist. to Empty
is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level
is low, the DTE display will change to — .

NOTE:
● If the amount of fuel added while the ignition
switch is OFF is small, the display just before
the ignition switch is turned OFF may con-
tinue to be displayed.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3

06/08/07—debbie ੭

WHA0702 WHA0703 LHA0671
Average speed (MPH or km/h) Fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km) Trip time
The Average Speed mode shows the average The Fuel Economy mode shows the average fuel The trip time mode displays the trip time since the
speed since the last reset. To calculate the aver- economy since the last reset. last reset.
age speed, driving distance is divided by driving
For approximately the first 30 seconds and 1/3 The maximum time that can be displayed by the
time.
mile (500 m) after a reset or connecting the Trip Time screen is 99 hours : 59 minutes : 59
For approximately the first 30 seconds after a battery cables, the display will show —. seconds.
reset or reconnecting the battery cables, the
Resetting fuel economy Resetting trip time
display will show —.
The fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0. The Trip Time calculation can be reset to 0. Press
Resetting average speed
Press the TRIP INFO button for more than ap- the TRIP INFO button for more than approxi-
The average speed calculation can be reset to 0. proximately 2 seconds. mately 2 seconds.
Press the TRIP INFO button for more than ap-
proximately 2 seconds.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

CLOCK HOW TO USE THE AUDIO BUTTON
The digital clock displays the time when the igni- (for control panel)
tion key is in OFF, ACC or ON. The audio system must be turned on to access
If the power supply is disconnected, the this menu.
clock will not indicate the correct time. Pressing the AUDIO button will change
Readjust the time. the settings menu as follows:
Adjusting the time Bass → Mid → Treble → Fade → Balance →
Speed Sense Volume → Beep ON/OFF → Lan-
To adjust the time, press and hold the CLOCK
guage → Audio → Bass
DISP button for more than approximately 1.5
seconds. Hour Adjust will appear on the screen For additional information, see “Audio System”
and the hours will start flashing. later in this section.
Press the SEEK or TUNE button to adjust the hour. Beep on/off LHA0672
Press the CLOCK DISP button again. Minute
Adjust will appear on the screen and the minutes To turn off the beep, press the TUNE button to DOOR WARNING
will start flashing. select “OFF”. This will disable the beep sound The DOOR OPEN screen will be automatically
during menu selection (except some caution displayed any time a door or the trunk is open and
Press the SEEK or TUNE button to adjust the beep sounds).
minutes. the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
Press the CLOCK DISP button again. Clock Is Language If the door is open for longer than 10 seconds the
Set will appear on the screen. The language can be changed to “ENGLISH”, screen will no longer display which door is open,
“FRANÇAIS” or “ESPANOL” by pressing the but the DOOR OPEN warning will remain until
NOTE: TUNE button. the door is closed.
If you enter the clock adjustment mode and
do not press any button for approximately 7
seconds, the screen will change to Clock Is
Set. The screen will exit out of the clock
adjustment mode and return to the audio or
off screen.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to
the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
When you use this system, make sure the engine
is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will use up all the battery power,
and the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
ENTER button — This is a button on the control
panel.
“Display” key — This is a select key on the screen.
By selecting this key you can proceed to the next
function.
HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK AND
ENTER BUTTON
Use the joystick to choose an item on the display
screen. Move the joystick up, down, left or right to
WHA0677 highlight an item. Then press the ENTER button
1. brightness control button 6. DEST button* to select the item or perform the action.
(P. 4-17) 7. ROUTE button*
2. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-7) 8. MAP button*
3. Joystick and ENTER button (P. 4-6) 9. GUIDE VOICE button*
4. SETTING button (P. 4-11) 10. zoom out button*
5. TRIP button (P. 4-7) zoom in button*

06/09/07—cathy ੭

HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON ● Average Speed - Average speed driven
(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.
This button has two functions.
Resetting trip 1 and trip 2
● Go back to the previous display (cancel).
Each trip screen can be reset to 0. Press the TRIP
If you press the BACK button during setup, the
button to select the TRIP screen to be reset.
setup will be canceled and/or the display will
return to the previous screen. ● Select the “Reset” key on screen by press-
ing the ENTER button, or
● Finish setup.
● Press the TRIP button for more than approxi-
In some screens pressing the BACK button ac-
mately 1.5 seconds.
cepts the changes made during setup.
SETTING UP THE START-UP
SCREEN LHA0552
When you turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, the HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON
system start-up warning is displayed on the
screen. Read the warning and select the “OK” When the TRIP button is pressed, the following
key by pressing the ENTER button. modes will display on the screen.
If you do not press the ENTER button, the Navi- Warning message (if any) → TRIP 1 → TRIP 2 →
gation system will not proceed to the next step in FUEL ECONOMY → MAINTENANCE → Audio
the Navigation display. or OFF → TRIP 1
If you do not touch a button or screen key for Each trip display tracks an independent trip and
more than 1 minute on the system start-up warn- displays the following:
ing screen, the screen will change to the audio
● Elapsed Time - Journey time since the last
screen automatically.
reset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59
To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate minutes.
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
● Driving Distance - Distance driven (mile or
km) since the last reset.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

Resetting fuel economy
The average fuel economy calculation can be
reset to 0. Press the TRIP button repeatedly until
the FUEL ECONOMY menu is shown, then ei-
ther:
● Select the “Reset” key on screen by press-
● Press the TRIP button for more than approxi-
mately 1.5 seconds.
Distance to empty (MI or km)
The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
LHA0553 LHA0554
driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly
Fuel economy calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel Maintenance items
tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display
Press the TRIP button to display Average Fuel is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level Press the TRIP button to display maintenance
Economy and Distance To Empty. is low, the DTE display will change to (*). information or set maintenance intervals for the
following:
Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)
NOTE: ● Engine Oil
The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based
● If the amount of fuel added while the ignition ● Tire Rotation
on fuel consumption since the last reset. The
switch is OFF is small, the display just before
display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3 ● Tire Pressure (if so equipped)
the ignition switch is turned OFF may con-
mile (500 m). After a reset or connecting the tinue to be displayed.
battery cables, the display will show (**.*). For setting the Tire Pressure display, refer to “Tire
● When driving uphill or rounding curves, the pressure information” later in this section.
fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily
change the display.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

LHA0555 LHA0556 LHA0483
Changing the maintenance interval Resetting the maintenance interval Displaying the maintenance notice re-
Select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” key The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION mainte- minder
using the joystick and press the ENTER button to nance intervals can be reset to 0 miles (kilome- Select the “Display Maintenance Notification”
display the screen to change the maintenance ters). key and press the ENTER button to display the
interval. MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically
Select the “Reset” key using the joystick and
Select the “Maintenance Schedule” key using the press the ENTER button. at the set maintenance interval.
joystick and move the joystick to right or left to set The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen (ENGINE
the maintenance interval. OIL and TIRE ROTATION) will be automatically
displayed as shown when both of the following
conditions are met:
● The vehicle is driven the set distance and the
ignition key is turned OFF.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

● The ignition key is turned ON the next time Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the
the vehicle will be driven. heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the
outside temperature.
To return to the previous display after the MAIN-
TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-
the BACK button. played on the screen:
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.
each time the key is turned ON until one of the
following conditions are met: WARNING
● “Reset” key is selected. ● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
● “Display Maintenance Notification” is set to
indicated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
OFF.
System (TPMS) will not function and
● The maintenance interval is set again. the low tire pressure warning light will
LHA0557
flash for approximately 1 minute. The
Tire pressure information light will remain on after 1 minute. Con-
tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
To display tire pressure information, press the possible for tire replacement and/or
TRIP button repeatedly until the MAINTENANCE system resetting.
screen is displayed. Select the “Tire Pressure”
key using the joystick and press the ENTER but- ● Replacing tires with those not originally
ton. specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-
cates that the pressure is being measured. After
a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will
be displayed randomly.
The order of tire pressure figures displayed on
the screen does not correspond with the actual
order of the tire position.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

LHA0558 LHA0632 LHA0633
HOW TO USE THE SETTING Display settings Brightness/contrast/map background:
BUTTON Select the “Display” key and press the ENTER Select the “Brightness/Contrast/Map Back-
When the SETTING button is pressed, the SET- button. The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will ap- ground” key to adjust the brightness and contrast
TINGS screen will appear on the display. You can pear. of the map background. Use the joystick to adjust
select and/or adjust several functions, features the brightness to darker or brighter and the con-
and modes that are available for your vehicle. trast to lower or higher.
Move the joystick and press the ENTER button to Use the joystick to select the “Map Background”
select each item to be set. key. Press the ENTER button or move the joystick
right or left to choose a “Dark” or “Bright” map
background.
The new settings are automatically saved when
you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK
button or any other mode button.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

To turn the screen on,
● Press the SETTING button and select the
“Display” key and then select the “Display
Off” key. Then set the screen to on by press-
● Hold the button for approximately 2
seconds and the message “resuming dis-
play” will appear and the “Display Off” key
will be automatically turned on (no amber
indicator).

LHA0642 LHA0632
Display off: Lower display setting:
Select the “Display Off” key. The indicator of the You can choose to display the audio or HVAC
“Display Off” turns amber and the message (Heater and air conditioner) functions on the
above will be displayed briefly. When the audio, lower part of the display. Select the “Lower Dis-
HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any mode play Setting” key by using the joystick. Then se-
button on the control panel is operated, the dis- lect the “Audio” or “HVAC” key using the joystick
play turns on for that operation. If one of the or by pressing the ENTER button.
control panel buttons is pressed, the display will
not automatically turn off until that operation is
finished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-
matically after 5 seconds.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

LHA0651 LHA0673 LHA0674
Any time audio information is shown on the main Vehicle electronic systems Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle:
part of the screen, HVAC information will be With this option ON, the driver’s seat automati-
displayed on the lower part of the screen. HVAC Select the “Vehicle Electronic Systems” key by cally moves back and returns to the original po-
information will be shown even if “Audio” is se- using the joystick and pressing the ENTER but- sition for ease of exit and entry.
lected to be displayed on the lower part of the ton. The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS
screen. screen will be displayed. Lift steering column when exiting vehicle:
With this option ON, the steering column auto-
You can set the following operating conditions by matically tilts up and returns to the original posi-
selecting the desired item using the joystick, then tion for ease of exit and entry.
pressing the ENTER button. The indicator light, box
at the left of the selected item, alternately turns on Selective door unlock: Select to change
and off each time the ENTER button is pressed. which doors will unlock first during an unlocking
operation:
Indicator light is illuminated — ON
Only the driver’s door ←→ All the doors
Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF


06/08/07—debbie ੭

Sensitivity of automatic headlights: Select
to change the sensitivity setting of the automatic
headlights:
● Lower: less sensitive, automatic headlights
will take longer to come on when the head-
light sensor senses less ambient light.
● Higher: more sensitive, automatic headlights
will come on quicker when the headlight
sensor senses less ambient light.
Automatic headlights off delay: Select to
change the setting for the length of time the
automatic headlights remain on after exiting the
LHA0675 LHA0565 vehicle.
Keyless remote response — horn: Select to Keyless remote response — lights: Select to Speed dependent wiper: Select to turn on or
turn on or turn off the horn chirp mode used when turn on or turn off the hazard indicator flash mode turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent
the LOCK button on the Intelligent Key is used when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the wiper function.
pressed. Intelligent Key is pressed.
Intelligent Key lock response — sound: Se-
NOTE: NOTE: lect to change the sound of the Intelligent Key
mode used when a request switch is pushed to
If you change the horn beep or the lamp If you change the horn beep or the lamp lock the doors.
flash feature with the Intelligent Key, the flash feature with the Intelligent Key, the
display screen will not show the current mode will not be changed with the display. Select to turn off all sounds made when a request
mode. Use the Intelligent Key to return to switch is pushed to lock the doors, by selecting
Use the Intelligent Key to return to the
the previous mode and re-enable the dis- the “OFF” key using the joystick.
previous mode and re-enable the display
play screen control.
control. Intelligent Key unlock response — beep
sound: Select to turn on or turn off the sound of
Auto re-lock time: Select to set the length of the Intelligent Key mode used when a request
time before doors automatically re-lock. switch is pushed to unlock the doors.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

Intelligent Key lock/unlock function: Select You can select the language and unit using the
to turn on or turn off the door lock and unlock joystick or pressing the ENTER button.
modes used when a request switch is pushed.
The settings are automatically saved when you
Return all settings to default: Select to exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or
change all VEHICLE ELECTRONICS SYSTEMS any other mode button.
to their default settings.

LHA0561

System settings
Select the “System Settings” key by using the
joystick and pressing the ENTER button. The
SYSTEM SETTINGS screen will be displayed.
Language/unit
The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when
selecting the “Language/Unit” key and pressing
the ENTER button.
Language: English or French
Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG
Metric — km, °C, L/100 km


06/08/07—debbie ੭

LHA0562 LHA0566 LHA0567
Clock Setting daylight savings time: Adjusting the time to the GPS:
Adjusting the time: Use the “Daylight Saving Time” key to adjust the Select the “Auto Adjust” key.
clock to daylight savings time.
Select the “Hours” or “Minutes” key and move the The time will be reset to the GPS time.
joystick to the right or left to adjust the time. ON: Automatically adjusts for daylight savings
time.
The time will change step by step.
OFF: The current time is displayed.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

The GPS time (manual time) corresponding to
the selected zone will be displayed. Pacific zone
has been set as the initial (default) setting.
Beep setting
With this option ON, a beep will sound if any
audio button is pressed.
Navigation settings
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding these set-
tings.
Guidance voice settings
LHA0568 LHA0563 Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
Selecting the time zone: 2. Select one of the following zones, depend- er’s Manual for information regarding these set-
ing on the current location. tings.
1. Select the “Select Time Zone” key.
● Pacific zone BUTTON
The TIME ZONE screen will appear.
● Mountain zone To change the display brightness, press
the button. Pressing the button again will
● Central zone change the display to “DAY” or “NIGHT” display.
Then, adjust the brightness by moving the joy-
● Eastern zone
stick right or left.
● Atlantic zone
If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if the
● Newfoundland zone BACK button is pressed, the display will return to
the previous display.
After selection, the CLOCK SETTINGS screen
will appear.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

VENTILATORS

WHA0686 WHA0687 WHA0688
Center Side Rear
Adjust air flow direction by moving the ventilator
slides.
Open or close the ventilators by using the dial.
Move the dial toward the to open the ven-
tilators or toward the to close them.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic)

● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
Start the engine and operate the controls to
activate the air conditioner.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating
(AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round as the
system automatically works to keep a constant
LHA0681 temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed
1. Temperature control dial (driver’s side) are also controlled automatically.
WARNING
2. (fan speed control) button 1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be
3. AUTO climate control ON button ● The air conditioner cooling function op- displayed.)
erates only when the engine is running.
4. MODE (manual air flow control) button 2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left
5. (front defroster) button ● Do not leave children or adults who or right to set the desired temperature.
6. DUAL (passenger side temperature would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets ● Adjust the temperature display to about 75°
control) ON/OFF button F (24° C) for normal operation.
should also not be left alone. They
7. Temperature control dial (passenger’s could accidentally injure themselves or
side) ● The temperature of the passenger compart-
others through inadvertent operation of ment will be maintained automatically. Air
8. Air recirculation button the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, flow distribution and fan speed are also con-
9. Rear window defroster switch temperatures in a closed vehicle could trolled automatically.
10. A/C (air conditioner) ON/OFF button quickly become high enough to cause
11. OFF button for climate control system severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

● A visible mist may be seen coming from the Dehumidified defrosting or defogging Air recirculation
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a 1. Push the defroster button on. The in- Push the air recirculation button to recirculate
malfunction. dicator light on the button will come on. interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light
on the button will come on.
3. You can individually set driver and front pas- 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature. The air recirculation cannot be activated when
senger side temperature using each tem-
the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode.
perature control dial. When the DUAL but- ● To quickly remove ice from the outside of the
ton or passenger side temperature dial is windows, set the fan speed to maximum. Air flow control
turned, the DUAL indicator will come on. To
● As soon as possible after the windshield is Pushing the MODE button manually controls air
turn off the passenger side temperature
clean, push the AUTO button to return to the flow and selects the air outlet:
control, push the DUAL button.
automatic mode. — Air flows from center and side
Heating (A/C OFF) ventilators.
● When the front defroster button is pushed,
The air conditioner does not activate. When you the air conditioner will automatically be — Air flows from center and side
need to heat only, use this mode. turned on at outside temperatures above ventilators and foot outlets.
23°F (Ϫ5°C). The air recirculate mode auto- — Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
1. Push the A/C button. (A/C OFF will be dis-
matically turns off, allowing outside air to be — Air flows from defroster and foot
played and A/C indicator will turn off.)
drawn into the passenger compartment to outlets.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the further improve the defogging performance. — Air flows from defroster outlets.
desired temperature.
MANUAL OPERATION To turn system off
● The temperature of the passenger compart-
Fan speed control Press the OFF button.
ment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution and fan speed are also con-
Push the fan control button to manually
trolled automatically.
control the fan speed.
● Do not set the temperature lower than the
outside air temperature. Otherwise the sys- Push the AUTO button to return to automatic
tem may not work properly. control of the fan speed.

● Not recommended if windows fog up.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

OPERATING TIPS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-
hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with
● When the engine coolant temperature and the environment in mind.
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is ozone layer.
not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera- Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-
ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-
will operate normally. tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner
system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant
and lubricant recommendations” in the “Techni-
cal and consumer information” section of this
manual.
WHA0209
A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-
The sunload sensor, located on the top passen- mentally friendly” air conditioning system.
ger side of the instrument panel, helps the system
maintain a constant temperature. Do not put any- WARNING
thing on or around this sensor.
The air conditioner system contains re-
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner ser-
vice should be done only by an experi-
enced technician with proper equipment.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

AUDIO SYSTEM

RADIO Reception conditions will constantly change be- Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position signal distance and interference from other ve- signals reach the receiver at the same time. The
and press the POWER/VOLUME control knob to hicles can work against ideal reception. De- signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-
turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with the scribed below are some of the factors that can mentary flutter or loss of sound.
engine not running, the key should be turned to affect your radio reception.
the ACC position. AM RADIO RECEPTION
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Radio reception is affected by station signal AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build- Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 bend around objects and skip along the ground.
ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ- miles (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single chan- In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality nel) FM having slightly more range than stereo ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
normally are caused by these external influences. FM. External influences may sometimes interfere these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-
with FM station reception even if the FM station is ject to interference as they travel from transmitter
Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-
within 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM to receiver.
hicle may influence radio reception quality.
signal is directly related to the distance between
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
Radio reception the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
characteristics as light. For example, they will
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra- seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
reflect off objects.
dio reception. These circuits are designed to areas where no obstacles exist.
extend reception range, and to enhance the qual- Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
ity of that reception. a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
and/or drift.
However there are some general characteristics
Static and flutter: During signal interference from SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even buildings, large hills or due to antenna position equipped)
when the finest equipment is used. These char- (usually in conjunction with increased distance When the satellite radio is first installed or the
acteristics are completely normal in a given re- from the station transmitter) static or flutter can battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may
ception area, and do not indicate any malfunction be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait
in your NISSAN radio system. treble control to reduce treble response. more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and


06/08/07—debbie ੭

the vehicle outside of any metal or large building Compact disc (CD) player
for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary
data. CAUTION
No satellite radio reception is available when the ● Do not force a compact disc into the CD
RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio insert slot. This could damage the CD
stations unless optional satellite receiver and an- and/or CD changer/player.
tenna are installed and an XMா satellite radio
service subscription is active. Satellite radio is ● Trying to load a CD with the CD door
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. closed could damage the CD and/or CD
changer.
Satellite radio performance may be affected if
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio ● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
signal. player at a time.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite ● Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm)
antenna. round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can
or packaging.
affect satellite radio performance. Remove the
ice to restore satellite radio reception ● During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the hu-
midity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
LHA0099
● The player may skip while driving on
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS rough roads.
● The CD player sometimes cannot func-
tion when the compartment tempera-
ture is extremely high or low.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

● Do not expose the CD to direct sun- CHECK DISC: virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3
light. compression removes the redundant and
● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor- irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the
● CDs that are in poor condition or are rectly (the label side is facing up, human ear doesn’t hear.
dirty, scratched or covered with finger- etc.).
prints may not work properly. ● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
● Confirm that the CD is not bent or bits per second used by a digital music file.
● The following CDs may not work prop- warped and it is free of scratches. The size and quality of a compressed digital
erly:
PRESS EJECT: audio file is determined by the bit rate used
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD) when encoding the file.
This is an error due to excessive tem-
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R) ● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
perature inside the player. Remove the
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) CD by pressing the EJECT button. After
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD
● Do not use the following CDs as they conversion) per second.
can be played when the temperature of
may cause the CD player to malfunc- the player returns to normal. ● ID3 tag — The ID3 tag is the part of the
tion: encoded MP3 file that contains information
UNPLAYABLE:
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter about the digital music file such as song title,
The file is unplayable in this audio sys- artist, album title, encoding bit rate, track
● CDs that are not round tem (only MP3 CD). time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is
● CDs with a paper label displayed on the Album/Artist/Track title line
Compact Disc with MP3 on the display.
● CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges Terms:

● This audio system can only play pre- ● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
recorded CDs. It has no capability to Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
record or burn CDs. most well-known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
● If the CD cannot be played, one of the quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
following messages will be displayed. normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the
file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with

06/08/07—debbie ੭

Playback order:
Playback order of the CD with compressed files
(MP3) is as illustrated.
● The names of folders not containing MP3
files are not shown in the display.
● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“ROOT” is displayed.
● The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.

WHA1090
Playback order chart


06/08/07—debbie ੭

Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW
Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
Supported
MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
versions*
Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512
Text character number limitation 31 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:
Displayable character codes
(UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
Cannot play
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names
and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Poor sound quality
Bit rate may be too low.
It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3 disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.
before the music starts
playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
Music cuts off or skips
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
files
Moves immediately to the When a non-MP3 file has been given an extension of “.MP3” or “.mp3”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there will be approximately 5
next song when playing seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
Songs do not play back in The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
the desired order


06/08/07—debbie ੭

11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
12. SEEK (CHANNEL) button
13. RADIO button*
14. CD/AUX button
15. PRESET A·B·C button

*No satellite radio reception is available
when the RADIO button is pressed to
access satellite radio stations unless
optional satellite receiver and antenna
are installed and an XMா satellite radio
service subscription is active. Satellite
radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER
For all operation precautions, see ЉAudio opera-
tion precautionsЉ earlier in this section.
No satellite radio reception is available when the
LHA0678 RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio
stations unless optional satellite receiver and an-
1. pause/mute button 7. AUDIO button (Bass, Mid, Treble,
tenna are installed and an XMா satellite radio
2. CD insert slot Fade, Balance, SSV (if so equipped), service subscription is active. Satellite radio is
3. CD eject button Beep and Language) not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
4. MIX/RPT button 8. AUX jack
5. CLOCK DISP button 9. POWER/VOLUME control knob
6. TUNE (CATEGORY) button 10. SCAN button

06/08/07—debbie ੭

Audio main operation desired level. You can also use the TUNE button through CD text as follows: Track number and
to adjust Fader and Balance modes. Fader ad- Track time ←→ Album title ←→ Song title.
POWER/VOLUME control: justs the sound level between the front and rear
● Track number displays the track number se-
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then speakers and Balance adjusts the sound be-
lected on the disc.
push the POWER/VOLUME control knob while tween the right and left speakers.
the system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) ● Track time displays the amount of time the
To change the SSV mode to OFF, LEVEL1 to
which was playing immediately before the system track has played.
LEVEL5 press the TUNE button left or right.
was turned off. ● Album title displays the title of the CD being
To change the Beep to ON or OFF, press the
To turn the system off, press the played.
TUNE button left or right. This will enable or
POWER/VOLUME control knob. disable the beep sound heard during menu se- ● Song title displays the title of the selected
Turn the POWER/VOLUME control knob to ad- lection. CD track.
just the volume. To change the Language to English, Français or Display satellite radio display mode (if so
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen- Espanol, press the TUNE button left or right. equipped)
sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the To change the text displayed when listening to
changes as the driving speed changes.
desired level, press the AUDIO button re- satellite radio (if so equipped) press the CLOCK
AUDIO button (Bass, Mid, Treble, peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears. DISP button. The CLOCK DISP button will scroll
Fade, Balance, SSV, Beep and Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automati- through the broadcast information as follows:
Language): cally reappear after about 5 seconds. Channel number ←→ Category name ←→
Press the AUDIO button to change the Channel name ←→ Artist name ←→ Song title.
CLOCK DISP (display) button:
mode as follows: ● Channel number displays the channel num-
Pressing the CLOCK DISP (display) button will
Bass → Mid → Treble → Fade → Balance → ber of the selected satellite radio station.
show text information about CD or MP3 and SAT
Speed Sense Volume (if so equipped) → Beep (satellite, if so equipped) in the audio display. ● Category name displays the category name
ON/OFF → Language → Audio → Bass of the selected satellite radio station.
CD display mode
To adjust Bass, Mid, Treble, Fade and Balance,
● Channel name displays the channel name of
press the AUDIO button until the desired To change the text displayed while playing a CD
the selected satellite radio station.
mode appears in the display. Press the TUNE with text, press the CLOCK DISP button. The
button to adjust Bass, Mid and Treble to the CLOCK DISP button will allow you to scroll

06/08/07—debbie ੭

● Artist name displays the name of the artist, stations unless optional satellite receiver and an- SCAN (tuning) button:
host or weather condition of the selected tenna are installed and an XMா satellite radio
satellite radio station. service subscription is active. Satellite radio can Press the SCAN button to stop at each
only be installed in vehicles that were factory broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the
● Song title displays the song title, show
pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is not button again during this 5 second period will stop
name, or temperature of the selected satel-
available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If satellite scan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that
lite radio station.
radio is not operational then the RADIO button is station. If the SCAN button is not pressed
Clock operation used to toggle between AM and FM bands. within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to the next
For additional information on setting the clock, If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO station.
see “Adjusting the time” earlier in this section. button is pressed, the compact disc will auto- PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera-
pause/mute button (Type A only): matically be turned off and the last radio station tions):
played will come on.
18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT
To mute or pause the audio sound, press The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM (satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C
the pause/mute button. stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast preset button in any combination of FM, AM or
signal is weak, the radio will automatically change SAT stations.
Press the button again to resume the audio
from stereo to monaural reception.
sound. 1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using the
TUNE (tuning) button:
FM/AM/SAT radio operation PRESET A·B·C select button.

FM/AM/SAT band select: To manually tune the radio, press the TUNE 2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station
button or . band.
Pressing the RADIO button will change the band
as follows: To move quickly through the channels, press and 3. Tune to the desired station using manual,
hold either the or button. SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
AM ←→ FM ←→ SAT (satellite, if so equipped)
SEEK (tuning) button: of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
When the RADIO button is pressed while the 6) until a beep sound is heard.
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
Press the SEEK button or for less 4. The channel indicator will then come on and
radio will come on at the station last played.
than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low or low the sound will resume. Programming is now
No satellite radio reception is available when the to high frequencies and stop at the next broad- complete.
RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio casting station.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

5. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the radio is already operating, it will automati- Press button several times to skip back
cally turn off and the compact disc will play. through tracks. The compact disc will go back the
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
number of times the button is pressed.
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that If the system has been turned off while the com-
case, reset the desired stations. pact disc was playing, pressing the When the SEEK button is pressed for less
POWER/VOLUME control knob will start the than 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing,
Radio data system (RDS):
compact disc. the next track will start to play from its beginning.
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data Press button several times to skip through
CD/AUX button:
information service transmitted by some radio tracks. The compact disc will advance the num-
stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur- When the CD/AUX button is pressed with the ber of times the button is pressed. (When the last
rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but system off and the compact disc loaded, the track on the compact disc is skipped through, the
many stations are now considering broadcasting system will turn on and the compact disc will start first track will be played.)
RDS data. to play.
MIX/RPT (mix and repeat) button:
RDS can display: When the CD/AUX button is pressed with the
When the MIX/RPT button is pressed while the
● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”. compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the
radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc is being played, the play pattern
● Station name, such as “The Groove”. compact disc will start to play. can be changed as follows:
● Music or programming type such as “Clas- TUNE (Rewind and Fast Repeat All → Repeat Track → Mix All Tracks →
sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”. Forward) button: Repeat All
● Artist and song information. When the TUNE button or is Repeat All: the entire disc will be repeated
pressed while the compact disc is being played, Repeat Track: the current track will be repeated
If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
the compact disc will play while rewinding or fast Mix All Tracks: all tracks will be played randomly
RDS icon is displayed.
forwarding. When the button is released, the
SCAN button:
Compact disc (CD) player operation compact disc will return to normal play speed.
While listening to a CD, press the SCAN
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position SEEK button:
button to preview the first 10 seconds of each
and insert the compact disc into the slot with the
track on the CD playing. Pressing the
label side facing up. The compact disc will be When the SEEK button is pressed for less
SCAN button again during this 10 second period
guided automatically into the slot and start play- than 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing,
ing. the track being played returns to its beginning. stops the scan and the CD remains on that track.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

CD/AUX (Auxiliary) button:
The AUX jack is located on the audio system. The
AUX audio input jack accepts any standard ana-
log audio input such as from a portable cassette
tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computers.
Press the CD/AUX button to play a compatible
device when it is plugged into the AUX jack.
CD EJECT:

When the button is pressed with the com-
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected.
When button is pressed while the com-
pact disc is being played, the compact disc will
eject and the system will turn off.
CD IN indicator:
CD IN indicator appears on the display when the
CD is loaded with the system on.

LHA0679
Type A
1. CD LOAD button 6. TUNE (CAT·FOLDER) button
2. CD insert slot 7. AUDIO button (Bass, Mid, Treble,
3. CD eject button Fade, Balance, SSV (if so equipped),
4. MIX/RPT button Beep and Language)
5. CLOCK DISP button 8. AUX jack


06/08/07—debbie ੭

9. POWER/VOLUME control knob Audio main operation desired level. You can also use the TUNE button
10. SCAN button to adjust Fader and Balance modes. Fader ad-
POWER/VOLUME control: justs the sound level between the front and rear
11. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons
12. SEEK (CH·FILE) button Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then speakers and Balance adjusts the sound be-
13. RADIO button* push the POWER/VOLUME control knob while tween the right and left speakers.
14. CD/AUX button the system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) To change the SSV mode to OFF, LEVEL1 to
15. PRESET A·B·C button which was playing immediately before the system LEVEL5 press the TUNE button left or right.
was turned off.
To change the Beep to ON or OFF, press the
*No satellite radio reception is available To turn the system off, press the TUNE button left or right. This will enable or
when the RADIO button is pressed to POWER/VOLUME control knob. disable the beep sound heard during menu se-
access satellite radio stations unless Turn the POWER/VOLUME control knob to ad- lection.
optional satellite receiver and antenna just the volume. To change the Language to English, Français or
are installed and an XMா satellite radio
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen- Espanol, press the TUNE button left or right.
service subscription is active. Satellite sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume
radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
changes as the driving speed changes.
and Guam. desired level, press the AUDIO button re-
AUDIO button (Bass, Mid, Treble, peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears.
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH Fade, Balance, SSV, Beep and Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automati-
COMPACT DISC (CD) CD Language): cally reappear after about 5 seconds.
CHANGER (if so equipped) Press the AUDIO button to change the CLOCK DISP (display) button:
For all operation precautions, see ЉAudio opera- mode as follows:
Pressing the CLOCK DISP (display) button will
tion precautionsЉ earlier in this section. Bass → Mid → Treble → Fade → Balance → show text information about CD or MP3 and SAT
Speed Sense Volume (if so equipped) → Beep (satellite, if so equipped) in the audio display.
No satellite radio reception is available when the
ON/OFF → Language → Audio → Bass
RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio CD display mode
stations unless optional satellite receiver and an- To adjust Bass, Mid, Treble, Fade and Balance,
tenna are installed and an XMா satellite radio press the AUDIO button until the desired To change the text displayed while playing a CD
service subscription is active. Satellite radio is mode appears in the display. Press the TUNE with text, press the CLOCK DISP button. The
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. button to adjust Bass, Mid and Treble to the CLOCK DISP button will allow you to scroll

06/08/07—debbie ੭

through CD text as follows: Track number and ● Album title displays the title of the album of Clock operation
Track time ←→ Album title ←→ Song title. the song playing.
For additional information on setting the clock,
● Track number displays the track number se- ● Artist name displays the name of the artist of see “Adjusting the time” earlier in this section.
lected on the disc. the song playing.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
● Track time displays the amount of time the ● Song title displays the title of the song play-
track has played. ing. FM/AM/SAT band select:

● Album title displays the title of the CD being Display satellite radio display mode (if so Pressing the RADIO button will change the band
played. equipped) as follows:

● Song title displays the title of the selected To change the text displayed when listening to AM ←→ FM ←→ SAT (satellite, if so equipped)
CD track. satellite radio (if so equipped) press the CLOCK When the RADIO button is pressed while the
DISP button. The CLOCK DISP button will scroll ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
MP3 display mode
through the broadcast information as follows: radio will come on at the station last played.
To change the text displayed when listening to a Channel number ←→ Category name ←→
CD with MP3s and ID3 tags, press the CLOCK Channel name ←→ Artist name ←→ Song title. No satellite radio reception is available when the
DISP button. The CLOCK DISP button will scroll RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio
● Channel number displays the channel num- stations unless optional satellite receiver and an-
through the CD text as follows: Disc number, ber of the selected satellite radio station.
Track number and Folder number ←→ Folder title tenna are installed and an XMா satellite radio
←→ Album title ←→ Artist name ←→ Song title. ● Category name displays the category name service subscription is active. Satellite radio can
of the selected satellite radio station. only be installed in vehicles that were factory
● Disc number displays the number of the pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is not
current disc playing. ● Channel name displays the channel name of
available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If satellite
the selected satellite radio station.
● Track number displays the number of the radio is not operational then the RADIO button is
track playing on the selected disc. ● Artist name displays the name of the artist, used to toggle between AM and FM bands.
host or weather condition of the selected
● Folder number displays the number of the satellite radio station. If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO
current folder on the MP3 CD. button is pressed, the compact disc will auto-
● Song title displays the song title, show matically be turned off and the last radio station
● Folder title displays the title of the folder. name, or temperature of the selected satel- played will come on.
lite radio station.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera- rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but
stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast tions): many stations are now considering broadcasting
signal is weak, the radio will automatically change RDS data.
18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT
from stereo to monaural reception.
(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C RDS can display:
TUNE (tuning) button: preset button in any combination of FM, AM or
● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
SAT stations.
To manually tune the radio, press the TUNE ● Station name, such as “The Groove”.
1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using the
button or . PRESET A·B·C select button. ● Music or programming type such as “Clas-
To move quickly through the channels, press and sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.
2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station
hold either the or button. band. ● Artist and song information.
SEEK (tuning) button: 3. Tune to the desired station using manual, If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any RDS icon is displayed.
Press the SEEK button or for less of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low or low 6) until a beep sound is heard.
Compact disc (CD) changer operation
to high frequencies and stop at the next broad- Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position
casting station. 4. The channel indicator will then come on and
and insert the compact disc into the slot with the
the sound will resume. Programming is now
SCAN (tuning) button: label side facing up. The compact disc will be
complete.
guided automatically into the slot and start play-
5. Other buttons can be set in the same man- ing. To insert the disc, first press the but-
Press the SCAN button to stop at each
ner. ton.
broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the
button again during this 5 second period will stop If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse If the radio is already operating, it will automati-
scan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that cally turn off and the compact disc will play.
station. If the SCAN button is not pressed case, reset the desired stations.
If the system has been turned off while the com-
within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to the next Radio data system (RDS): pact disc was playing, pressing the POWER
station. button will start the compact disc.
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data
information service transmitted by some radio Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs
stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur- in the CD changer.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

LOAD button: MP3 TUNE CD select buttons:
(CAT•FOLDER) button:
To play another CD that has been loaded, press a
To insert a CD in the CD changer, press the load While playing an MP3, press the TUNE CD select button (1 – 6).
button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select button or to scan forward or back-
the loading slot by pressing the CD insert select MIX/RPT button:
ward through available folders.
button (1 – 6), then insert the CD. When the MIX/RPT button is pressed while a
To fast forward or rewind through an audio track,
To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press the compact disc is being played, the play pattern
press the TUNE button or for more
load button for more than 1.5 seconds. can be changed as follows:
than 1.5 seconds.
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the Repeat All → Repeat Disc → Repeat Track → Mix
SEEK button:
display when CDs are loaded into the changer. All Discs → Mix Disc → Repeat All
CD/AUX button: When the SEEK button is pressed for less Repeat Disc: The disc that is currently playing will
than 1.5 seconds while a CD or MP3 CD is be repeated.
When the CD/AUX button is pressed with the Repeat Track: The track that is currently playing
playing, the track or file being played returns to its
system off and the compact disc loaded, the will be repeated.
beginning. Press button several times to
system will turn on and the compact disc will start
skip back through tracks or files. The CD or MP3 Mix All Disc: Tracks from all discs will be played
to play.
CD will go back the number of times the button is randomly.
When the CD/AUX button is pressed with the pressed. Mix Disc: Tracks from the disc that is currently
compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the playing will be played randomly.
radio will automatically be turned off and the When the SEEK button button is pressed Repeat All: All discs will be played normally, with
compact disc will start to play. for less than 1.5 seconds while a CD or MP3 CD no special play pattern enabled.
is playing, the next track or file will start to play
TUNE (Rewind and Fast from its beginning. Press button several MP3 MIX/RPT mode:
Forward) button: times to skip through tracks or files. The CD or When the MIX/RPT button is pressed while an
While playing a compact disc without MP3 press MP3 CD will advance the number of times the MP3 compact disc is being played, the play
the TUNE button (rewind) or (fast button is pressed. When the last track or file on pattern can be changed as follows:
forward), the compact disc will play while rewind- the CD or MP3 CD is skipped through, the first
ing or fast forwarding. When the button is re- track or file will be played. If there are multiple Repeat All → Repeat Disc → Repeat Folder →
leased, the compact disc will return to normal CDs in the CD changer, when the last track or file Repeat Track → Mix All Disc → Mix Disc → Mix
play speed. is skipped through, the next CD will start to play. Folder → Repeat All

06/08/07—debbie ੭

Repeat Disc: The disc that is currently playing will the SCAN button again during this 10 All discs:
be repeated. second period stops the scan and the MP3 CD
● Press and hold the button for more
Repeat Folder: The folder selected that is cur- remains in that folder.
than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be
rently playing will be repeated. CD/AUX (Auxiliary) button: ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed
Repeat Track: The track that is currently playing within 15 seconds, or the button is
will be repeated. The AUX jack is located on the audio system. The
pressed again during the eject sequence,
Mix All Disc: Tracks from all discs will be played AUX audio input jack accepts any standard ana-
the entire disc eject sequence will be can-
randomly. log audio input such as from a portable cassette
celed.
Mix Disc: Tracks from the disc that is currently tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computers.
playing will be played randomly. When this button is pressed while the compact
Press the CD/AUX button to play a compatible
disc is being played, the compact disc will eject
Mix Folder: Tracks from that folder that is cur- device when it is plugged into the AUX jack.
and the last source will be played.
rently accessed will be played randomly.
CD EJECT:
Repeat All: All discs will be played normally, with CD IN indicator:
no special play pattern enabled. The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDs
Current/Selected disc:
SCAN button: have been loaded into the changer in CD mode
● Press the button, then press the slot only.
number (1 – 6) for the desired disc. The
While listening to a CD, press the SCAN compact disc will be ejected. If no slot num-
button to preview the first 10 seconds of each ber (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loaded
track on the CD playing. Pressing the disc will be ejected. Also, if the ejected disc
SCAN button again during this 10 second period is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc
stops the scan and the CD remains on that track. will reload.
MP3 SCAN mode:

While listening to an MP3 CD, press the
SCAN button to preview the first 10 seconds of
each file in the current folder. The scan will con-
tinue on to the next folder and files if there is more
than one folder on the MP3 CD. Pressing


06/08/07—debbie ੭

11. LOAD button
12. CD insert slot
13. CD eject button
14. POWER/VOLUME control knob
15. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons
16. TUNE/TRACK and AUDIO control knob
(BASS, MID, TREBLE, FADE, BAL-
ANCE and SSV (if so equipped))
*No satellite radio reception is available
and “NO SAT” is displayed when the SAT
button is pressed unless optional satellite
receiver and antenna are installed, and an
XMா satellite radio service subscription is
active. Satellite radio not available in
Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (if
so equipped)
For all operation precautions, see ЉAudio opera-
LHA0680 tion precautionsЉ earlier in this section.
Type B
No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
1. SEEK/TRACK button 6. CD button SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is
2. TUNE/FOLDER·CAT button 7. FM button pressed unless optional satellite receiver and
3. SCAN/RPT button 8. AM button antenna are installed, and an XMா satellite radio
4. DISP button 9. SAT* button service subscription is active. Satellite radio not
5. PRESET A·B·C button 10. AUX button available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

Audio main operation the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts CD display mode
the sound between the right and left speakers.
POWER/VOLUME control: To change the text displayed while playing a CD
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the with text, press the DISP button. The DISP button
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedly will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows:
push the POWER/VOLUME control knob while until the radio or CD display reappears. Other- Disc title, Track title ←→ Disc title ←→ Track title.
the system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) wise, the radio or CD display will automatically
which was playing immediately before the system ● Track title mode displays the title of the se-
reappear after about 10 seconds.
was turned off. lected CD track.
DISP (display) button:
To turn the system off, press the ● Disc title mode displays the title of the CD
POWER/VOLUME control knob. The DISP (display) button will show text about being played.
FM stations, CD or MP3 and SAT (satellite, if so
Turn the POWER/VOLUME control knob to ad- MP3 display mode
equipped) information in the audio display.
just the volume. To change the text displayed when listening to an
FM display mode
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen- MP3 with MP3 text (when CD with text is being
sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume To change the text displayed while listening to an used), press the DISP button. The DISP button
changes as the driving speed changes. FM station that broadcasts with Radio Data Sys- will scroll through the CD text as follows: Folder
tem (RDS), press the DISP button. The DISP title, Artist name, Track title ←→ Folder title ←→
AUDIO knob (Bass, Treble, Fade and Bal- button will allow you to change RDS information Artist name ←→ Track title.
ance): as follows: Station call number → Program type
→ Station information → Station call number. To change the default display mode press the
Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as AUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODE
follows: ● Station call number displays the radio fre- appears on the display, then rotate the knob to
quency number of the station. select the following display modes: Disc number
Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance
● Program type displays the type or category ←→ Folder number.
To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press of radio station.
the AUDIO knob until the desired mode appears Once a display mode is selected press the AU-
in the display. Turn the Tuning knob to adjust ● Station information displays information the DIO knob again to store the setting.
Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also radio station wants to broadcast.
● Folder number mode displays the folder
use the Tuning knob to adjust Fader and Balance For additional information, see “Radio data sys- number and the file number of the folder
modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between tem (RDS)” later in this section. currently being played.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

● Disc number mode displays the number se- ● Title mode displays the song title, show signal is weak, the radio will automatically change
lected disc and the track that is currently name, or temperature of the selected satel- from stereo to monaural reception.
being played. lite radio station.
TUNE/FOLDER·CAT
Display satellite radio display mode (if so FM/AM/SAT radio operation (Tuning):
equipped)
FM/AM/SAT band select: To manually tune the radio, press the
To change the text displayed when listening to TUNE/FOLDER·CAT button or or
Pressing the FM, AM or SAT radio select button
satellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISP will change the band to either FM, AM or SAT turn the tuning knob to right or left.
button. The DISP button will scroll through the (satellite, if so equipped) radio stations. To move quickly through the channels, hold either
broadcast information as follows: Name ←→
When the FM, AM or SAT radio select button is the or button down for more than
Title ←→ Current display mode.
pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or 1.5 seconds.
To change the default display mode press the ON position, the radio will come on at the station SEEK/TRACK (tuning)
AUDIO button to display mode and press the last played. button:
TUNE button to select the following display
modes: Channel number ←→ Channel name The last station played will also come on when Press the SEEK/TRACK button or
the POWER/VOLUME control knob is pressed
←→ Name ←→ Title. Once the display mode is for less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low
on.
selected press the AUDIO button again to store or low to high frequencies and stop at the next
the setting. If the AUDIO button is not pressed No satellite radio reception is available and “NO broadcasting station.
after 8 seconds the display will refresh with the SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is
pressed unless optional satellite receiver and To seek quickly through the channels, press and
last selected display mode setting.
antenna are installed and an XMா satellite radio hold the SEEK/TRACK button for more than 1.5
● Channel number mode displays the channel service subscription is active. Satellite radio is seconds. When the button is released the radio
number of the selected satellite radio sta- not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. will seek to the next broadcasting station.
tion.
If a compact disc is playing when the FM, AM or SCAN/RPT tuning button:
● Channel name mode displays the channel SAT radio select button is pushed, the compact Press the SCAN/RPT button to stop at each
name of the selected satellite radio station. disc will automatically be turned off and the last
broadcasting station (AM, FM or SAT, if so
radio station played will come on.
● Name mode displays the name of the artist, equipped) for 5 seconds. Pressing the button
host or weather condition of the selected The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM again during this 5 second period will stop scan
satellite radio station. stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that

06/08/07—debbie ੭

station. If the SCAN/RPT button is not pressed Radio data system (RDS): If the system has been turned off while the com-
within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to the next pact disc was playing, pressing the
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compact
station.
information service transmitted by some radio disc.
PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera- stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-
tions): rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but button:
many stations are now considering broadcasting
18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT To insert a CD in the CD changer, press
RDS data.
(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C the button for less than 1.5 seconds. Se-
preset button in any combination of FM, AM or RDS can display: lect the loading slot by pressing the CD insert
SAT stations. select button (1 – 6), then insert the CD.
● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using the To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press and
● Station name, such as “The Groove”.
PRESET A·B·C select button. hold the button for more than 1.5 seconds.
● Music or programming type such as “Clas-
2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the
sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.
band. display when CDs are loaded into the changer.
● Artist and song information.
3. Tune to the desired station using manual, CD button:
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any If the station broadcasts RDS information, the When the CD button is pressed with the system
of the desired station memory buttons (1 – RDS icon is displayed. off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
6) until a beep sound is heard. turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
Compact disc (CD) changer operation
4. The channel indicator will then come on and When the CD button is pressed with the com-
the sound will resume. Programming is now Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position
pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radio
complete. and press the button, then press one of
will automatically be turned off and the compact
the CD insert (1–6) slots. Insert the compact disc disc will start to play.
5. Other buttons can be set in the same man- into the slot with the label side facing up. The
ner. compact disc will be guided automatically into
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse the slot and start playing.
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that If the radio is already operating, it will automati-
case, reset the desired stations. cally turn off and the compact disc will play.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

TUNE/FOLDER·CAT SEEK/TRACK button: ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.
button: 1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will
CD: When the button is pressed for less than be repeated.
1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the 1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playing
● While playing a CD press the track being played returns to its beginning. Press will be repeated
or button, the CD plays at an in- several times to skip back through tracks. The ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will be
creased speed while rewinding or fast for- compact disc will go back the number of times played randomly
warding through the current track being the button is pressed. 1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-
played. When the button is released the CD rently playing will be played randomly
returns to normal play speed. When the button is pressed for less than
1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing, CD EJECT:
MP3 CD:
the next track will start to play from its beginning.
● Press several times to skip through tracks. The Current disc:
While playing an MP3, press the compact disc will advance the number of times
● Press the button for less than 1.5
TUNE/FOLDER·CAT button or the button is pressed. (When the last track on the
seconds. Then press one of the CD select (1
to scan backward or forward through avail- compact disc is skipped through, the first track
– 6) buttons for the selected CD to be
able folders. will be played.)
ejected. If one of the CD select (1 – 6)
● Press and hold the or button CD select buttons: buttons are not pressed within 1.5 seconds
for more than 1.5 seconds while an MP3 CD the current loaded CD will be ejected. If the
To play another CD that has been loaded, press a
is playing, the MP3 CD plays at an increased disc is not removed within 15 seconds, the
CD select button (1 – 6).
speed while rewinding or fast forwarding disc will reload.
through the current track being played. SCAN/RPT:
When the button is released the MP3 CD All discs:
returns to normal play speed. When the SCAN/RPT play button is pushed
● Press and hold the button for more
while the compact disc is played, the play pattern
than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be
can be changed as follows:
ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed
ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRACK RPT within 15 seconds, or the button is
→ ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISC pressed again during the eject sequence,
RPT the entire disc eject sequence will be can-
celed.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

When this button is pressed while the compact
disc is being played, the compact disc will eject
and the last source will be played.
CD IN indicator:
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDs
have been loaded into the changer in CD mode
only.

LHA0683 LHA0049
AUX jack (if so equipped) CD CARE AND CLEANING
The AUX jack ᭺ is located below the air condi-
1 ● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
tioner controls. The AUX audio input jack accepts disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
any standard analog audio input such as from a ● Always place the discs in the storage case
portable cassette tape player, MP3 player or when they are not being used.
laptop computers. ● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do
when it is plugged into the AUX jack. not wipe the disc using a circular motion.
● Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.
● A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

If you have the Type B switch, with the ignition key
turned to the ACC or ON position push the
MODE switch to turn the audio system on.
MODE select switch
Push the mode select switch to change the mode
in the following sequence: Preset A → Preset B
→ Preset C → CD* → AUX**.
*This mode is only available when a CD is loaded.
**This mode is only available when a compatible
auxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack.

WHA0611 WHA0612
Volume control switch
Type A Type B Push the volume control switch up or down to
1. Volume control switch 1. Volume control switch increase or decrease the volume.
2. MODE select switch 2. Phone operation switch Tuning
3. POWER on/off switch 3. POWER on and MODE select switch
4. Tuning switch 4. Tuning switch Memory change (radio):
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR Push the tuning switch ( or ) for less
AUDIO CONTROL than 1.5 seconds to change presets.
The audio system can be operated using the Seek tuning (radio):
controls on the steering wheel.
Push the tuning switch ( or ) for
POWER on/off switch more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previ-
ous radio station.
With the ignition key turned to the ACC or ON
position, push the POWER switch to turn the
audio system on or off.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

Next/Previous track (CD): When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
CAUTION
your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following
Push the tuning switch or for less ● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-
precautions, otherwise the new equipment may
than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the sible from the electronic control
adversely affect the engine control system and
present track or skip to the next track. Push modules.
other electronic parts.
several times to skip back or skip through tracks.
● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
Change disc (CD) (if so equipped): WARNING (20 cm) away from the electronic con-
Push the tuning switch or for more ● A cellular telephone should not be used trol system harnesses. Do not route the
than 1.5 seconds to change the playing disc up while driving so full attention may be antenna wire next to any harness.
or down. given to vehicle operation. Some juris- ● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele- as recommended by the manufacturer.
ANTENNA phones while driving.
● Connect the ground wire from the CB
Window antenna ● If you must make a call while your ve- radio chassis to the body.
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear ● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.
lar phone operational mode (if so
window.
equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-
ercise extreme caution at all times so
CAUTION full attention may be given to vehicle
● Do not place metalized film near the operation.
rear window glass or attach any metal ● If a conversation in a moving vehicle
parts to it. This may cause poor recep- requires you to take notes, pull off the
tion or noise. road to a safe location and stop your
● When cleaning the inside of the rear vehicle before doing so.
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a
dampened soft cloth.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

BLUETOOTHா HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM (if so equipped)

WARNING
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.

WHA0614
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetoothா make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have an ap- your cellular phone in the vehicle.
proved Bluetoothா enabled cellular phone, you
Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-
can set up the wireless connection between your
vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto-
With Bluetoothா wireless technology, you can
matically connected with the in-vehicle phone

06/08/07—debbie ੭

module when the ignition switch is turned to the ● When the radio wave condition is not ideal ceived, including interference that may
ON position with the paired cellular phone turned or ambient sound is too loud, it may be cause undesired operation.
on and carried in the vehicle. difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:
ing a call.
You can register up to 5 different Bluetoothா
This equipment complies with FCC radiation expo-
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. ● Do not place the cellular phone in an area
sure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environ-
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone surrounded by metal or far away from the
at a time. ment. This equipment should be installed and op-
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
erated with minimum distance of 8 inches (20 cm)
Before using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone quality degradation and wireless connection
between the radiator and your body. This Transmit-
System, refer to the following notes. disruption. ter must not be co-located or operating in conjunc-
● Set up the wireless connection between a ● While a cellular phone is connected through tion with any other antenna or transmitter.
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone mod- the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat-
USING THE SYSTEM
ule before using the hands-free phone system. tery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetoothா The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
● Some Bluetoothா enabled cellular phones Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge hands-free operation of the Bluetoothா Phone
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle System.
cellular phones.
phone module. Please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom- ● If the hands-free phone system seems to be If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
mended phone list and pairing. malfunctioning, please refer to “Trouble- not be available so full attention may be given to
shooting guide” later in this section. You can vehicle operation.
● You will not be able to use a hands-free
also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for
phone under the following conditions:
troubleshooting help.
Initialization
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser- When the ignition switch is turned to the ON
● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
vice area. position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
which takes a few seconds. When completed,
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult phone antenna and body, etc.
the amber light on the overhead console illumi-
to receive a cellular signal; such as in a
This device complies with Part 15 of the nates and the system is ready to accept voice
tunnel, in an underground parking garage,
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- commands. If the button is pressed before
near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
lowing two conditions: (1) this device may the initialization completes, the system will an-
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it not cause harmful interference, and (2) this nounce “Hands-free phone system not ready”
from being dialed. device must accept any interference re- and will not react to voice commands.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

Operating tips ● If you need to hear the available commands ● To speed the operation you can say multiple
for the current menu again, say “Help” and commands. For example, press the
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN the system will repeat them. button then say “Phonebook, New entry”
Voice Recognition system, observe the following: rather than “Phonebook.” Wait for the voice
● If a command is not recognized, the system
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as feedback prompt then say “New entry”.
announces, “Command not recognized.
possible. Close the windows to eliminate Please try again.” Repeat the command in a How to say numbers
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration clear voice.
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
from recognizing voice commands correctly. ● If you want to go back to the previous com- way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer
mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc- to the following rules and examples.
● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a tion” any time the system is waiting for a
command. Otherwise, the command will not ● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.
response.
be received properly. Example: 1-800-662-6200
● You can cancel a command when the sys-
● Start speaking a command within 5 seconds tem is waiting for a response by saying, – “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh
after the tone sounds. “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces oh”, or
● Speak in a natural voice without pausing “Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh
between words. also press the button on the steering
oh”
wheel at any time. Whenever the VR session
Giving voice commands is cancelled, a double beep is played to ● Words can be used for the first 4 digits
indicate you have exited the system. places only.
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
and release the button located on the ● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice Example: 1-800-662-6200
steering wheel. The light on the overhead con- feedback, press the volume control switches
sole flashes to signal you have entered a voice (+ or -) on the steering wheel while being – “One eight hundred six six two six two oh
recognition (VR) session. After the tone sounds, provided with feedback. You can also use oh”,
speak a command. the radio volume control knob. – NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty
The command given is picked up by the micro- ● In most cases you can interrupt the voice two hundred, and
phone, and voice feedback is given when the feedback to speak the next command by
– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two
pressing the button on the steering
command is accepted. hundred.
wheel.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

● Numbers can be spoken in small groups.
The system will prompt you to continue en- PHONE/END
tering digits, if desired. Press the button to cancel a VR
Example: 1-800-662-6200 session or end a call.
– “One eight oh oh” GETTING STARTED
The system repeats the numbers and The following procedures will help you get
prompts you to enter more. started using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-
– “six six two” ditional command options, refer to “List of voice
The system repeats the numbers and commands” later in this section.
prompts you to enter more.
Choosing a language
– “six two oh oh”
WHA0615
You can interact with the Bluetoothா Hands-Free
● You can say “Star” for * and “Pound” for # at Phone System using English, Spanish or French.
any time in any position of the phone number. CONTROL BUTTONS
To change the language, perform the following.
Example: 1-555-1212 *123 The control buttons for the Bluetoothா Hands-
1. Press and hold the button for more
– “One five five five one two one two star Free Phone System are located on the steering than 5 seconds.
one two three” wheel.
PHONE/SEND 2. The system announces: “Press the
NOTE: PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the
Press the button to initiate a VR hands-free phone system to enter the
For best results, say phone numbers as session or answer an incoming call. speaker adaptation mode or press the
single digits. PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-
You can also use the button to ferent language.”
skip through system feedback and to 3. Press the button.
enter commands during a call. See “List
of voice commands” and “During a call” For information on speaker adaptation, see
“Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” later in this
later in this section for more information. section.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

4. The system announces the current language Pairing procedure 4. Say: “New phone” ᭺. The system acknowl-
C
and gives you the option to change the lan- edges the command and asks you to initiate
guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in NOTE: pairing from the phone handset ᭺.
D
French). Use the following chart to select
the language. The pairing procedure must be performed The pairing procedure of the cellular phone
when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle varies according to each cellular phone
NOTE: starts moving during the procedure, the model. See the cellular phone Owner’s
procedure will be cancelled. Manual for details. You can also visit
Note: You must press the button or www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-
the button within 5 seconds to Main Menu tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel-
change the language.
“Setup” ᭺
A lular phones.
Current
Press Press “Pair phone” ᭺
B When prompted for a Passkey code, enter
(PHONE/SEND) (PHONE/END)
language
to select to select “New phone” ᭺
C “1234” from the handset. The Passkey code
Initiate from handset ᭺
D “1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and
English Spanish French
cannot be changed.
Spanish English French Name phone ᭺
E
5. The system asks you to say a name for the
French English Spanish Assign priority ᭺
F
phone ᭺.
E
5. If you decide not to change the language, do Choose ringtone ᭺
G
If the name is too long or too short, the
not press either button. After 5 seconds, the 1. Press the button on the steering system tells you, then prompts you for a
VR session will end, and the language will wheel. The system announces the available
not be changed. name again.
commands.
Also, if more than one phone is paired and
2. Say: “Setup” ᭺. The system acknowledges
A the name sounds too much like a name
the command and announces the next set of already used, the system tells you, then
available commands. prompts you for a name again.
3. Say: “Pair phone” ᭺. The system acknowl-
B
edges the command and announces the
next set of available commands.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

6. The system asks you to assign a priority level 3. Say the number you wish to call ᭺. For
B LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS
᭺. The priority level determines which
F example, 555-1212 can be said as “five five
phone is active when more than one paired five one two one two.” See “How to say
Bluetoothா phone is in the vehicle. Follow numbers” earlier in this section for more Main Menu
the instructions provided by the system or information.
“Call”
refer to “Setup” later in this section for more 4. When you have finished speaking the phone
information on changing priorities. “Phone Book”
number, the system repeats it back and an-
nounces the available commands. “Memo Pad”
7. The system will ask if you would like to select
a custom ring tone ᭺. Follow the instruc-
G 5. Say: “Dial” ᭺. The system acknowledges
C “Setup”
tions provided by the system or refer to the command and makes the call. When you press and release the button on
“Setup” later in this section for more infor- the steering wheel, you can choose from the
For additional command options, see “List of
mation on selecting ringtones. commands on the Main Menu. The following
voice commands” later in this section.
pages describe these commands and the com-
Making a call by entering a phone Receiving a call mands in each sub-menu.
number
When you hear the ring tone, press the Remember to wait for the tone before
button on the steering wheel. speaking.
Main Menu Once the call has ended, press the button You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands
“Call” ᭺
A on the steering wheel. currently available any time the system is waiting
for a response.
Number (speak digits) ᭺
B
NOTE:
“Dial” ᭺
C If you want to end an action without completing it,
If you do not wish to take the call when you you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the
1. Press the button on steering wheel. A hear the ring tone, press the button system is waiting for a response. The system will
tone will sound. on the steering wheel. end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is
cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate
2. Say: “Call” ᭺. The system acknowledges
A For additional command options, see “List of
you have exited the system.
the command and announces the next set of voice commands” later in this section.
available commands. If you want to go back to the previous command,
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time
the system is waiting for a response.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

When you get used to the menus in the system, When prompted by the system, say the name of “Call back” ᭺
D
you can talk ahead by saying more than one the phone book entry you wish to call. The system
Use the Call Back command to dial the number of
command at a time. For example, say, “Call five acknowledges the name.
the last incoming call within the vehicle.
five five one two one two” or “Memo pad record.”
If there are multiple locations associated with the
The system acknowledges the command, re-
Also, when you get used to the system re- name, the system asks you to choose the loca-
peats the number and begins dialing.
sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone by tion.
pressing the button on the steering wheel. If a call back number does not exist, the system
Once you have confirmed the name and location, announces, “There is no number to call back” and
However, if you press the button when the
the system begins the call. ends the VR session.
system is waiting for a response from you it will
end the VR session. Number (speak digits) ᭺
B During a call
“Call” When prompted by the system, say the number During a call there are several command options
you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers” available. Press the button on the steering
and “Making a call by entering a phone number” wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-
Main Menu earlier in this section for more details. mands.
“Call” “Redial” ᭺
C ● “Help” — The system announces the avail-
Name (speak name) ᭺
A
Use the Redial command to call the last number
able commands.
Number (speak digits) ᭺
B that was dialed within the vehicle. ● “Go back/Correction” — The system an-
“Redial” ᭺
C nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session
NOTE: and returns to the call.
“Call Back” ᭺
D
The system will not redial the last number ● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces
Name (speak name) ᭺
A
dialed by the handset keypad. “Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns
to the call.
If you have stored entries in the Phone Book, you The system acknowledges the command, re-
can dial a number associated with a name and peats the number and begins dialing. ● “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send
location. command to enter numbers during a call. For
If a redial number does not exist, the system example, if you were directed to dial an ex-
See “Phone book” later in this section to learn announces, “There is no number to redial” and tension by an automated system:
how to store entries. ends the VR session.
Say: “Send one two three four.”

06/08/07—debbie ੭

The system acknowledges the command “Phone book” When prompted by the system, say the name you
and sends the tones associated with the would like to give the new entry.
numbers. The system then ends the VR ses- NOTE: For example, say: “Mary.”
sion and returns to the call.
Phone book commands are not available If the name is too long or too short, the system
● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com- when the vehicle is moving. tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
mand to transfer the call from the Bluetoothா
Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular Main Menu Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
phone when privacy is desired. already stored, the system tells you, then prompts
“Phone Book”
you for a name again.
The system announces, “Transfer call. Call “New Entry” ᭺
A
transferred to privacy mode.” The system Once the system accepts the name and you
then ends the VR session. “Edit” ᭺
B
confirm it is correct, the system asks for a location
“Delete” ᭺
C (Home, Office, Mobile or Other).
You can also issue the Transfer Call com-
mand again to return to a hands-free call ЉList Names” ᭺
D For example, say: “Home.”
through the vehicle. The system acknowledges the location and asks
The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each
● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute phone paired with the system. Each name can for a number.
your voice so the other party cannot hear it. have up to 4 locations/phone numbers associ- For example, say: “five five five one two
Use the mute command again to unmute ated with it. one two.” See “How to say numbers”
your voice. earlier in this section for more
NOTE: information.
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phone The system repeats the number and prompts you
If a call is ended or the cellular phone book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone for the next command. When you have finished
network connection is lost while the Mute book if you are currently connected with entering numbers, choose “Store.”
feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset Phone B.
to “off” for the next call so the other party The system confirms the name, location and
can hear your voice. “New entry” ᭺
A number. The system then asks if you would like to
store another location for the same name. If you
Use the New Entry command to store a new
do not wish to store another location, the system
name in the system.
ends the VR session.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

“Edit” ᭺
B To delete entries from the phone book, say a “Memo pad”
name or “All entries” when prompted by the sys-
Use the Edit command to alter an existing phone
tem.
book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phone
Main Menu
number to an existing entry. The system acknowledges the command and
asks you to confirm the deletion. “Memo Pad”
When prompted by the system, say the name of
the entry you wish to edit. To delete the current redial number or call back “Record” ᭺
A

number, say “redial number” or “call back num- “Play” ᭺
B
The system acknowledges the name and asks
you for the location you would like to edit.
ber” when prompted by the system. “Delete” ᭺
C

If a redial number or a call back number exists, the The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voice
Say the name of the location. The system ac-
system deletes them without asking for confirma- memos, each up to 20 seconds long.
knowledges and asks you for the phone number
tion.
you would like to store with this location. “Record” ᭺
A
If there is no number for the entry you are trying to
See “How to say numbers” earlier in this section The system announces “Recording” and a tone
delete, the system says so and ends the VR
for more information. sounds, signaling you to begin.
session.
The system repeats the number and prompts you
“List names” ᭺
D Speak the information you wish to record clearly.
for the next command. When you have finished When you are done, press the or
entering numbers, choose “Store.” Use the List Names command to hear all the button on the steering wheel.
names and locations in the phone book.
The system confirms the name, location and A tone sounds and the system announces
number, then announces that the entry has been The system recites the phone book entries but “Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to end
stored. The system then ends the VR session. does not include the actual phone numbers. the VR session.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
“Delete” ᭺
C If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you wish
system goes back to the main menu.
Use the Delete command to erase one entry from to record over the oldest memo.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
the phone book, all entries from the phone book, “Play” ᭺
B
by pressing the button on the steering
the current redial number or the current call back
wheel. The system ends the VR session. The system plays back all the memos in the order
number.
of newest to oldest. The system ends the VR
session.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

If there are no memos recorded, the system an- NOTE: “List phone” ᭺
B
nounces “No messages to play.” The system
The pairing procedure must be performed Use the List Phone command to hear the names
ends the VR session.
when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle of the phones currently paired. If no phones are
“Delete” ᭺
C starts moving during the procedure, the paired, the system announces, “No paired
The Delete command erases all memos. The procedure will be cancelled. Also, see phones to list.” The system then ends the VR
system asks you to confirm this action before “Pairing procedure” earlier in this section session.
for additional information.
deleting all memos. “Select phone” ᭺
C
Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair a
“Setup” sixth phone, the system announces that you must Use the Select Phone command to select a
first delete one phone or replace an existing phone of lesser priority when two or more phones
phone. paired with Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone Sys-
Main Menu tem are in the vehicle at the same time.
“Setup” If you try to pair a phone that has already been
paired to your vehicle’s system, the system an- The system asks you to name the phone and
“Pair Phone” ᭺
A
nounces the name the phone is already using. confirm the selection.
“List Phone” ᭺
B The pairing procedure will then be cancelled.
Once the selection is confirmed, the selected
“Select Phone” ᭺
C When prompted by the system, choose from the phone remains active until the ignition switch is
“Change Priority” ᭺
D following commands: turned OFF or you select a new phone.
“Delete Phone” ᭺
E ● “New phone” — Refer to “Pairing a phone” “Change priority” ᭺
D
earlier in this section.
“Select Ringtone” ᭺
F Use the Change Priority command to change the
“Bluetooth Off” ᭺
G ● “Replace phone” — The system announces priority level of the active phone.
the names of the phones already paired and
Use the Setup command to change options as- asks which you would like to replace. The priority level determines which phone is ac-
sociated with the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone tive when more than one paired Bluetoothா
System. Once you say the name of the phone you phone is in the vehicle.
wish to replace, the pairing procedure will
“Pair phone” ᭺
A begin. Refer to “Pairing procedure” earlier in The system states the priority level of the active
this section. phone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3, 4,
Use the Pair Phone command to pair a phone to
the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System. ● “List phone” – See the description below. 5).


06/08/07—debbie ੭

If the new priority level is already being used for NOTE: You can still use the Memo Pad and access
another phone, the two phones will swap priority Setup.
When you delete a phone, the associated
levels.
phone book for that phone will also be SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE
For example, if the current priority levels are: deleted.
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-
Priority Level 1 = Phone A “Select ringtone” ᭺
F dialect users to train the system to improve rec-
Priority Level 2 = Phone B ognition accuracy. By repeating a number of
Use the Select Ringtone command to select the
Priority Level 3 = Phone C commands, the users can create a voice model of
tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call is
and you change the priority level of Phone C to received. their own voice that is stored in the system. The
Level 1, then: system is capable of storing a different speaker
The system announces the name of the active adaptation model for memory A and memory B.
Priority Level 1 = Phone C phone and asks you to choose from the following
Priority Level 2 = Phone B commands: If memory A is available, the system will use
Priority Level 3 = Phone A memory A to store the model. If memory A is in
● “Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtone use and memory B is available, the system will
“Delete phone” ᭺
E and asks if you would like to select that tone. use memory B to store the model. If both of the
If you say “No”, the system plays the next memory locations are in use, the system will ask
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a
ringtone available and continues to cycle the user to select which memory location should
specific phone or all phones from the Bluetoothா through the ringtones until you select one or
Hands-Free Phone System. be overwritten.
quit.
The system announces the names of the phones Training procedure
● “Silent” — The system asks you to confirm
already paired with the system and their priority your wish to disable the ringtone. The procedure for training a voice is as follows.
level. The system then gives you the option to
delete a specific phone, all phones or listen to the “Bluetooth off” ᭺
G 1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet
list again. outdoor location.
Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off the
Once you choose to delete a phone or all phones, Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System. 2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-
ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-
the system asks you to confirm this action. When the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone Sys-
sion in P (Park).
tem is off, you will not be able to make or receive
calls using NISSAN Voice Recognition. Also, you 3. Press and hold the button for more
will not have access to the Phone Book. than 5 seconds.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

4. The system announces: “Press the 11. The system will announce that speaker ad- ● memo pad record
PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the aptation has been completed and the sys-
● dial star two one seven oh
hands-free phone system to enter the tem is ready.
speaker adaptation mode or press the ● Yes
The SA mode will stop if:
PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-
● No
ferent language.” ● The button is pressed for more than 5
seconds in SA mode. ● select ring tone
5. Press the button.
● The vehicle begins moving during SA mode. ● dial eight five six nine two
For information on selecting a different lan-
guage, see “Choosing a language” earlier in ● The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or ● Bluetooth on
this section. LOCK position.
● setup change priority
6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected Training phrases ● call three one nine oh two
automatically. If both memory locations are
already in use, the system will prompt you to During the SA mode, the system instructs the ● nine seven pause pause three oh eight
overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro- trainer to say the following phrases. (The system
will prompt you for each phrase.) ● Cancel
vided by the system.
● phone book new entry ● call back number
7. When preparation is complete and you are
ready to begin, the press the button. ● dial three oh four two nine ● call star two zero nine five
8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the ● delete call back number ● delete phone
instructions provided by the system.
● setup pair phone ● dial eight three zero five one
9. When training is finished, the system will tell
● memo pad play ● Home
you an adequate number of phrases have
been recorded. ● eight pause nine three two pause seven ● four three pause two nine pause zero
10. The system will ask you to say your name. ● delete all entries ● delete redial number
Follow the instructions to register your
● call seven two four zero nine ● phone book list names
name.
● phone book delete entry ● call eight oh five four one


06/08/07—debbie ੭

● Correction ● memo pad delete TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
● setup change ring tone ● call seven six three oh one The system should respond correctly to all voice
● dial seven four oh one eight ● go back commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, try the following solutions.
● setup main menu ● call five six two eight zero
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
● Delete ● dial six six four three seven each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until
● dial nine seven two six six the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” earlier in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

System fails to interpret the command correctly. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-
prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” earlier in this section.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the using the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” earlier in this section.
phone book.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Traction Control System (TCS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Intelligent Key System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Rear sonar system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Nissan vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

06/08/07—debbie ੭

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING

WARNING ● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are a. The vehicle is raised for service.
entering the vehicle, drive with all win-
● Do not leave children or adults who b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
dows fully open, and have the vehicle
would normally require the assistance entering into the passenger
inspected immediately.
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets compartment.
should also not be left alone. They ● Do not run the engine in closed spaces
c. You notice a change in the sound of
could accidentally injure themselves or such as a garage.
the exhaust system.
others through inadvertent operation of ● Do not park the vehicle with the engine
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, d. You have had an accident involving
running for any extended length of time.
temperatures in a closed vehicle could damage to the exhaust system, un-
quickly become high enough to cause ● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving, derbody, or rear of the vehicle.
severe or possibly fatal injuries to otherwise exhaust gases could be
people or animals. drawn into the passenger compart- THREE-WAY CATALYST
ment. If you must drive with the trunk lid
● Closely supervise children when they The three-way catalyst is an emission control
open, follow these precautions:
are around cars to prevent them from device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
playing and becoming locked in the 1. Open all the windows. gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
trunk where they could be seriously in- 2. Set the air recirculation but- high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear ton to off and the fan control dial to
seatback and trunk lid securely latched high to circulate the air. WARNING
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys. ● If electrical wiring or other cable con- ● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-
nections must pass to a trailer through tem are very hot. Keep people, animals
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) the seal on the trunk lid or the body, or flammable materials away from the
follow the manufacturer’s recommen- exhaust system components.
WARNING dation to prevent carbon monoxide en- ● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
try into the vehicle. flammable materials such as dry grass,
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon ● The exhaust system and body should be waste paper or rags. They may ignite
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger- inspected by a qualified mechanic and cause a fire.
ous. It can cause unconsciousness or whenever:
death.

5-2 Starting and driving

06/08/07—debbie ੭

CAUTION TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
SYSTEM (TPMS) TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
from leaded gasoline will seriously re- Each tire, including the spare (if provided), function indicator is combined with the low tire
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to should be checked monthly when cold and in- pressure telltale. When the system detects a
help reduce exhaust pollutants. flated to the inflation pressure recommended by malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard mately one minute and then remain continuously
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
electrical systems can cause overrich tires of a different size than the size indicated on subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, function exists. When the malfunction indicator is
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv- you should determine the proper tire inflation illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
ing if the engine misfires, or if notice- pressure for those tires.) or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
able loss of performance or other un- malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
usual operating conditions are including the installation of replacement or alter-
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
detected. Have the vehicle inspected nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
promptly by a NISSAN dealer. the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
when one or more of your tires is significantly
● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pres- check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-
level. Running out of fuel could cause sure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
the engine to misfire, damaging the your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
three-way catalyst. the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and properly.
● Do not race the engine while warming it
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
up. Additional information:
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. ● The TPMS does not monitor the tire pres-
the engine. sure of the spare tire.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s ● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to km/h). Also, this system may not detect a
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a
telltale. flat tire while driving).
Starting and driving 5-3

06/08/07—debbie ੭

● The low tire pressure warning light does not For additional information, see “Low tire pressure ● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
automatically turn off when the tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” is replaced, tire pressure will not be
is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the section and “Tire pressure monitoring system indicated, the TPMS will not function
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be (TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section. and the low tire pressure warning light
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) will flash for approximately 1 minute.
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire WARNING The light will remain on after 1 minute.
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
gauge to check the tire pressure. ● If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden possible for tire replacement and/or
● Tire pressure rises and falls depending on steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, system resetting.
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road ● Replacing tires with those not originally
and the outside temperature. Low outside to a safe location and stop the vehicle specified by NISSAN could affect the
temperature can lower the temperature of as soon as possible. Driving with under- proper operation of the TPMS.
the air inside the tire which can cause a inflated tires may permanently damage
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the tires and increase the likelihood of ● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
the low tire pressure warning light to illumi- tire failure. Serious vehicle damage tire sealant into the tires, as this may
nate. If the warning light illuminates in low could occur and may lead to an acci- cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
ambient temperature, check the tire pres- dent and could result in serious per- sensors.
sure for all four tires. sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to CAUTION
● You can also check the pressure of all tires
(except the spare tire) on the display screen the recommended COLD tire pressure Do not place metalized film or any metal
(if so equipped). The order of the tire pres- shown on the Tire and Loading Informa- parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This
sure figures displayed on the screen does tion label to turn the low tire pressure may cause poor reception of the signals
not correspond with the actual order of the warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, from the tire pressure sensors, and the
tire position. See “Tire pressure information” replace it with a spare tire as soon as TPMS will not function properly.
in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case
and audio and phone systems” section. of emergency” section for changing a Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
flat tire.) interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-
minate.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

Some examples are: AVOIDING COLLISION AND DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio ROLLOVER DRIVING
frequencies are near the vehicle.
WARNING WARNING
– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle. Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe Never drive under the influence of alcohol
and prudent manner may result in loss of or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-
– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a duces coordination, delays reaction time
control or an accident.
DC/AC converter is being used in or near the and impairs judgement. Driving after
vehicle. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey drinking alcohol increases the likelihood
FCC Notice: all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, of being involved in an accident injuring
high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma- yourself and others. Additionally, if you
Changes or modifications not expressly ap- neuvers, because these driving practices could are injured in an accident, alcohol can
proved by the party responsible for compli- cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with increase the severity of the injury.
ance could void the user’s authority to op- any vehicle, loss of control could result in a
erate the equipment. collision with other vehicles or objects, or NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if you must choose not to drive under the influence
This device complies with Part 15 of the
the loss of control causes the vehicle to of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-
Canada.
avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under though the local laws vary on what is considered
Operation is subject to the following two the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre- to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
conditions: (1) This device may not cause scription or over-the-counter drugs which may affects all people differently and most people
harmful interference, and (2) this device cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as underestimate the effects of alcohol.
must accept any interference received, in- outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And
cluding interference that may cause undes- supplemental restraint system” section of this that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-
ired operation of the device. manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so. scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-
and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
or improperly belted person is significantly
more likely to be injured or killed than a
person properly wearing a seat belt.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

IGNITION SWITCH

1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)
WARNING
position.
Never turn the ignition knob to the LOCK
position while driving. The steering wheel 2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ON
will lock. This may cause the driver to lose direction.
control of the vehicle and could result in 3. Turn the key toward the LOCK position.
serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
The selector lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the foot brake pedal is
depressed.
There is an OFF position in between LOCK and
ACC, although it does not show on the lock
cylinder. When the ignition is in OFF the steering
LSD0171 wheel is not locked.
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it
must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclock-
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition wise from the straight up position.
switch cannot be turned to LOCK until the selec-
tor lever is moved to the P (Park) position. To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. To unlock the
When turning the ignition switch, make sure the steering wheel, push the ignition switch in
selector lever is in the P (Park) position. and turn it gently while rotating the steer-
ing wheel slightly right and left.
If the selector lever is not returned to the P (Park)
position, the ignition switch cannot be moved If the battery of the vehicle equipped with
toward LOCK. the Intelligent Key system is discharged,
the ignition switch cannot be turned from
When the ignition switch cannot be turned to- the LOCK position, even using the me-
ward the LOCK position when the Intelligent Key chanical key.
is in range, proceed as follows:


06/08/07—debbie ੭

IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS CAUTION If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
Push in the ignition switch to the ᭺ position
B Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition rate key ring to avoid interference from other
when you turn it. switch in ACC or ON positions when the devices.
engine is not running for an extended pe-
LOCK (Normal parking position) ᭺ :
A
riod. This can discharge the battery.
The ignition switch can only be locked in the
LOCK position. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is
SYSTEM
pushed in, and turned to the ACC position ᭺ C The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
while carrying the Intelligent Key. allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key.
ACC (Accessories) ᭺ :
C
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
This position activates electrical accessories
(for example, when interference is caused by
such as the radio, when the engine is not running.
another registered key, an automated toll road
ON (Normal operating position) ᭺ :
D device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
This position turns on the ignition system and the
cedures:
electrical accessories.
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
START ᭺ :
E
for approximately 5 seconds.
This position starts the engine. As soon as the
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK
engine has started, release the knob immediately.
position, and wait approximately 10 sec-
It will automatically return to the ON position.
onds.
The ignition switch cannot be turned back to the
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
LOCK position unless the selector lever is in the
P (Park) position. (It can be turned only to the ᭺
B 4. Restart the engine while holding the device
position.) (which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

● Make sure the area around the vehicle is 1. Apply the parking brake. engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the
clear. above procedure.
2. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N
● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool- (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as CAUTION
frequently as possible, or at least whenever The starter is designed not to operate if Do not operate the starter for more than
you refuel. the shift selector lever is in any of the 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
driving positions. not start, turn the key off and wait 10
● Check that all windows and lights are clean.
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the seconds before cranking again, otherwise
● Visually inspect tires for their appearance accelerator pedal by turning the ignition the starter could be damaged.
and condition. Also check tires for proper switch to START. Release the switch when
inflation. 4. Warm-up
the engine starts. If the engine starts, but
● Lock all doors. fails to run, repeat the above procedure. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-
onds after starting. Do not race the engine
● Position seat and adjust head restraints. ● If the engine is very hard to start in ex- while warming it up. Drive at moderate
● Adjust inside and outside mirrors. tremely cold weather or when restarting, speed for a short distance first, especially in
depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap- cold weather.
● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it
do likewise. In cold weather, keep the engine running for
and then crank the engine. Release the a minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting it
● Check the operation of warning lights when switch and the accelerator pedal when off. Starting and stopping the engine over a
the ignition switch is turned to the ON (3) the engine starts. short period of time may make the vehicle
position. See “Warning/indicator lights and ● If the engine is very hard to start because more difficult to start.
audible reminders” in the “Instruments and it is flooded, depress the accelerator
controls” section of this manual.
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After
cranking the engine, release the accel-
erator pedal. Crank the engine with your
foot off the accelerator pedal by turn-
ing the ignition switch to START. Release
the switch when the engine starts. If the


06/08/07—debbie ੭

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con- The CVT is designed so the foot brake
trolled to produce maximum power and smooth pedal MUST be depressed before shifting
TRANSMISSION (CVT) operation. from P (Park) to any drive position while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
WARNING The recommended operating procedures for this
transmission are shown on the following pages. The shift selector lever cannot be moved
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle out of P (Park) and into any of the other
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- performance and driving enjoyment. gear positions if the ignition switch is
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or manual
turned to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.
shift mode. Always depress the brake NOTE:
pedal until shifting is completed. Fail-
ure to do so could cause you to lose Engine power may be automatically re-
control and have an accident. duced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use slippery roads or while being tested on
caution when shifting into a forward or some dynamometers.
reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up. Starting the vehicle
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery 1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
roads. This may cause a loss of control. foot brake pedal before moving the shift
● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) selector lever out of the P (Park) position.
while the vehicle is moving. This could 2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and
cause an accident. move the shift selector lever into a driving
gear.
CAUTION
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill the vehicle in motion.
grade, do not hold the vehicle by depress-
ing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake 4. Stop the vehicle completely before shifting
should be used for this purpose. the selector lever to the P (Park) position.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

(Neutral), or any drive position, the key cannot be When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
turned to LOCK and be removed from the ignition first, then shift the selector lever into the P (Park)
switch. Additionally, the selector lever cannot be position.
moved to R (Reverse) from N (Neutral) or any R (Reverse):
drive position for about 3 minutes after the igni-
tion switch is turned to the ACC or OFF position. CAUTION
The selector lever can be moved from R (Re-
verse) to P (Park) with the key in the OFF or ACC Use this position only when the vehicle is
position. If this occurs, perform the following completely stopped.
steps: Use this position to back up. Make sure the
1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is vehicle is completely stopped before selecting
stopped. the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal
must be depressed to move the selector
2. Turn the key to the ON position. lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive
WSD0167
position to R (Reverse).
Shifting 3. Depress the foot brake pedal.
N (Neutral):
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake 4. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N
(Neutral) to restart the vehicle (P is pre- Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The
pedal and move the shift selector lever from P
ferred). Move the shift selector lever to P engine can be started in this position. You may
(Park) to any of the desired shift positions.
(Park) to park the vehicle and turn the igni- shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine
tion key to the LOCK position to remove the while the vehicle is moving.
WARNING
key. D (Drive):
Apply the parking brake if the selector
lever is in any position while the engine is P (Park): Use this position for all normal forward driving.
not running. Failure to do so could cause
Use this selector position when the vehicle is
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
parked or when starting the engine. Make sure
away and result in serious personal injury
or property damage. the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake
pedal should be depressed to move the
If the ignition switch is turned to OFF or ACC for selector lever from N (Neutral) or any drive
any reason while the vehicle is in R (Reverse), N position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

M5 (5th): When canceling the manual shift mode:
Use this position when driving up long slopes, or Return the selector lever to the D (Drive) position
for engine braking when driving down long to return the transmission to the normal driving
slopes. mode.
M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd): ● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-
sion may not shift to the selected gear.
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill This helps maintain driving perfor-
grades. mance and reduces the chance of ve-
M1 (1st): hicle damage or loss of control.
● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly
sion may shift up automatically to a
or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or
higher range than selected if the engine
mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep speed is too high. When the vehicle
WSD0167 downhill grades. speed decreases, the transmission auto-
Manual shift mode ● Remember not to drive at high speeds for matically shifts down. The transmission
extended periods of time in lower than M6 shifts to M1 (1st) gear before the vehicle
When the selector lever is shifted from D to the comes to a complete stop. When accel-
range. This reduces fuel economy.
manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or erating again, it is necessary to shift up
while driving, the transmission enters the manual When shifting up: to the desired range.
shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu- Move the selector lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts
ally. ● When the CVT fluid temperature is ex-
to higher range.) tremely low, the manual shift mode may not
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis- When shifting down: work and automatically shift as a drive mode.
played on the position indicator in the meter. This is not a malfunction. In this case, return
Move the selector lever to the Ϫ (down) side. the selector lever to D (Drive) and drive for a
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows: (Shifts to lower range.) while and then shift to the manual shift mode.
M1←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6 ● Moving the selector lever to the same side ● When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the
twice will shift the ranges in succession. How- shift range may upshift in lower rpm than
M6 (6th):
ever, if this motion is rapidly done, the second usual. This is not a malfunction.
Use this position for all normal forward driving. shifting may not be completed properly.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position Accelerator downshift
and remove the key — in D (Drive) position and manual
2. Apply the parking brake. shift mode —
3. Remove the shift lock release cover as For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-
shown. erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-
4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock sion down into lower range, depending on the
release slot and push down. vehicle speed.

5. Move the shift selector lever to the N (Neu- High fluid temperature protection
tral) position while holding down the shift mode
lock release.
This transmission has a high fluid temperature
6. Turn the key to the ON position to unlock the protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-
WSD0168 steering wheel. Now the vehicle may be comes too high (for example, when climbing
moved to the desired location. steep grades in high temperature with heavy
Shift lock release loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine
If the shift selector lever cannot be moved out of power and, under some conditions, vehicle
If the battery is discharged, the shift selector lever
P (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the trans- speed will be decreased automatically to reduce
may not be moved from the P (Park) position even
mission as soon as possible. the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle
with the brake pedal depressed.
speed can be controlled with the accelerator
To move the shift selector lever, release the shift WARNING pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be
lock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N limited.
If the selector lever cannot be moved from
(Neutral). However, the steering wheel will be the P (Park) position while the engine is
locked unless the ignition switch is turned to the Fail-safe
running and the brake pedal is depressed,
ON position. This allows the vehicle to be moved the stop lights may not work. Malfunction- If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-
if the battery is discharged. ing stop lights could cause an accident ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning
To push the shift lock release, complete the fol- injuring yourself and others. and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe
system may be activated. The MIL may
lowing procedure:
come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is
activated, see “Malfunction indicator light

06/08/07—debbie ੭

PARKING BRAKE

(MIL)” in the “Instrument and controls” sec-
WARNING
tion. This will occur even if all electrical
circuits are functioning properly. In this ● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
case, turn the ignition switch to the OFF leased before driving. Failure to do so
position and wait for 10 seconds. Then turn can cause brake failure and lead to an
the switch back to the ON position. The accident.
vehicle should return to its normal operat- ● Do not release the parking brake from
ing condition. If it does not return to its outside the vehicle.
normal operating condition, have a
NISSAN dealer check the transmission and ● Do not use the gear shift in place of the
repair if necessary. parking brake. When parking, be sure
the parking brake is fully engaged.
WARNING ● Do not leave children unattended in a
When the high fluid temperature protec- vehicle. They could release the parking
tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs, brake and cause an accident. WSD0169
vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. To engage: Pull the lever up ᭺.
A
The reduced speed may be lower than To release:
other traffic, which could increase the
chance of a collision. Be especially care- 1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
ful when driving. If necessary, pull to the
2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)
side of the road at a safe place and allow
position.
the transmission to return to normal op-
eration, or have it repaired if necessary. 3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever
slightly, push the button and lower com-
pletely ᭺.
B

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

CRUISE CONTROL

● The SET indicator light may blink when the To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to
cruise control switch is turned ON while the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch
pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or and release it. The SET indicator light in the
CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the
control system, use the following proce- accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set
dures. speed.
● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-
WARNING
celerator pedal. When you release the
Do not use the cruise control when driving pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously
under the following conditions: set speed.
● When it is not possible to keep the ● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
vehicle at a set speed. when going up or down steep hills. If this
● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in happens, drive without the cruise control.
LSD0159
speed. To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
1. ACCEL/RES switch following three methods.
● On winding or hilly roads.
2. COAST/SET switch
● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). ● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator
3. CANCEL switch
light in the instrument panel goes out.
4. ON·OFF switch ● In very windy areas.
● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle goes out.
CONTROL control and result in an accident.
● Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE
● If the cruise control system malfunctions, it CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS indicator light and SET indicator light in the
cancels automatically. The SET indicator instrument panel go out.
The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-
light in the instrument panel then blinks to
tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without The cruise control is automatically canceled and
warn the driver. keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:
● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the To turn on the cruise control, push the main ● you depress the brake pedal while pushing
cruise control switch off and have the sys- switch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru- the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.
tem checked by a NISSAN dealer. ment panel comes on. The preset speed is deleted from memory.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH To resume the preset speed, push and re-
CAUTION
(13 km/h) below the set speed. lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-
turns to the last set cruising speed when the During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
● you move the shift selector lever to N (Neu- vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h). follow these recommendations to obtain
tral). maximum engine performance and en-
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one sure the future reliability and economy of
of the following three methods. your new vehicle. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in short-
● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the ened engine life and reduced engine
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and performance.
release the COAST/SET switch.
● Avoid driving for long periods at constant
● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the
When the vehicle attains the speed you de- engine over 4,000 rpm.
sire, release the switch. ● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. ● Avoid quick starts.
Each time you do this, the set speed in-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). ● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one ● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
of the following three methods. (800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-
hicle attains the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it.
● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-
lease the switch when the vehicle slows to
the desired speed.
● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed de-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

06/08/07—debbie ੭

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain ● When cruising at highway speeds, it is more
cruising speeds with a constant accelerator economical to use the air conditioner and
position. leave the windows closed to reduce drag.
● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. ● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy. See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-
tion” in “Technical and consumer informa-
● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.
tion” later in this manual.
Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-
hicles.
● Use a proper gear range which suits road
conditions. On level roads, shift into high
gear as soon as possible.
● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
● Keep your engine tuned up.
● Follow the recommended periodic mainte-
nance schedule.
● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-
sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
● Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-
proper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
● Air conditioner operation lowers fuel
economy. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: ᭺
A

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel
gently touches the curb.
● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: ᭺
B

Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB: ᭺
C

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road
so the vehicle will move away from the cen-
WSD0050
ter of the road if it moves.
WARNING ● Never leave the engine running while 4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
the vehicle is unattended. tion and remove the key.
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass, ● Do not leave children unattended inside
waste paper or rags. They may ignite the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
and cause a fire. tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
● Safe parking procedures require that ous accidents.
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park). Fail- 1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
ure to do so could cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly or roll away and re- 2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)
sult in an accident. Make sure the shift position.
lever has been pushed as far forward as
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
it can go and cannot be moved without
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
depressing the foot brake pedal.
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic The brake system has two separate hydraulic
WARNING
pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at two wheels. ● While driving on a slippery surface, be
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you careful when braking, accelerating or
will still have control of the vehicle. However, BRAKE PRECAUTIONS downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-
much greater steering effort is needed, especially erating could cause the wheels to skid
in sharp turns and at low speeds. Vacuum assisted brakes and result in an accident.
WARNING The brake booster aids braking by using engine ● If the engine is not running or is turned
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the off while driving, the power assist for
If the engine is not running or is turned off vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, the brakes will not work. Braking will be
while driving, the power assist for the greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be harder.
steering will not work. Steering will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-
harder to operate. tance will be longer. Wet brakes
Using the brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the may pull to one side during braking.
brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return
downshift to a lower gear before going down a to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may speeds until the brakes function correctly.
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control. Parking brake break-in
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the
best brake performance.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

This procedure is described in the vehicle service – When installing a spare tire, make WARNING
manual and can be performed by a NISSAN sure that it is the proper size and type
dealer. as specified on the Tire and Loading Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
Information label. See “Tire and may result in increased stopping
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM Loading Information label” in the distances.
(ABS) “Technical and consumer informa- Self-test feature
tion” section of this manual.
WARNING The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
– For detailed information, see
● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte- pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
sophisticated device, but it cannot pre- nance and do-it-yourself” section of computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
vent accidents resulting from careless this manual. tests the system each time you start the engine
or dangerous driving techniques. It can and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or
help maintain vehicle control during The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear
braking on slippery surfaces. Remem- brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
ber that stopping distances on slippery braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a
surfaces will be longer than on normal The system detects the rotation speed at each malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis- wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre- tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the
tances may also be longer on rough, vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you preventing each wheel from locking, the system brake system then operates normally, but without
are using tire chains. Always maintain a helps the driver maintain steering control and anti-lock assistance.
safe distance from the vehicle in front helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-
of you. Ultimately, the driver is respon- pery surfaces. If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
sible for safety. self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
● Tire type and condition may also affect Using the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
braking effectiveness. Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De- Normal operation
– When replacing tires, install the press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,
but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper- The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5
specified size of tires on all four
ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer - 10 km/h).
wheels.
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)

When the ABS senses that one or more wheels When accelerating on slippery surfaces the tire
WARNING
are close to locking up, the system electronically may spin or slip. With the vehicle Traction Control
controls the pressure applied to each brake. System (TCS), sensors detect these movements ● The Traction Control System is de-
and control the braking and engine output to help signed to help improve driving stability
This action is similar to pumping the brakes very but does not prevent accidents due to
quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake improve vehicle stability while accelerating.
abrupt steering operation at high
pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or ● When the traction control system is operat- speeds or by careless or dangerous
feel a vibration from the actuator when it is oper- ing, the indicator in the instrument driving techniques. Reduce vehicle
ating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is panel blinks. speed and be especially careful when
operating properly. However, the pulsation may driving and cornering on slippery sur-
indicate that road conditions are hazardous and ● If the indicator blinks, the vehicle is
faces and always drive carefully.
extra care is required while driving. under slippery conditions. Be sure to drive
carefully. See “Slip indicator light” and “Trac- ● If brake related parts such as brake
tion Control System (TCS) off indicator pads, rotors and calipers are not stan-
light” in the “Instruments and controls” sec- dard equipment or are extremely dete-
tion of this manual. riorated, the Traction Control System
may not operate properly and the
● If a malfunction occurs in the system, indicator light may come on.
the and indicator lights
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
come on in the instrument panel.
If suspension parts such as shock ab-
As long as these lights are on, the traction control sorbers, struts, springs and bushings
function is canceled. The vehicle will behave like are not standard equipment or are ex-
a vehicle without the system. tremely deteriorated, the Traction Con-
trol System may not operate properly
and the indicator light may come
on.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM

● When driving on extremely inclined sur- When accelerating or driving on slippery sur- When the VDC system is operating, you may feel
faces such as higher banked corners, faces, the tires may spin or slide. With the Vehicle a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or
the Traction Control System may not Dynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors detect vibration from under the hood. This is normal and
operate properly and the indica- these movements and control the braking and indicates that the VDC system is working prop-
tor light may come on. Do not drive on engine output to help improve vehicle stability. erly.
these types of roads. ● When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) The computer has a built in diagnostic feature
● If wheels or tires other than the recom- system is operating, the SLIP indicator in that tests the system each time you start the
mended ones are used, the Traction the instrument panel blinks. engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse
Control System may not operate prop- at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you
erly and the indicator light may ● If the SLIP indicator blinks, the road condi-
may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in
come on. tions are slippery. Be sure to adjust your
the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an
speed and driving to these conditions. See
● The Traction Control System is not a indication of a malfunction.
“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle Dynamic
substitute for winter tires or tire chains Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “In-
on a snow covered road. WARNING
struments and controls” section.
● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
● Indicator light designed to help improve driving stabil-
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the ity but does not prevent accidents due
SLIP and indicator lights come on in to abrupt steering operation at high
the instrument panel. speeds or by careless or dangerous
As long as these indicator lights are on, the driving techniques. Reduce vehicle
traction control function is canceled. speed and be especially careful when
driving and cornering on slippery sur-
If the vehicle is operated with the Vehicle Dy-
faces and always drive carefully.
namic Control system OFF using the VDC OFF
switch, VDC functions will be turned off. The
VDC system will still try to transfer power from a
slipping drive wheel to one with more traction
when the VDC system switch is OFF. The SLIP
indicator will flash if wheel spin is detected. The
ABS will still operate with the VDC system off.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if so
equipped)

● If brake related parts such as brake ● If wheels or tires other than the recom-
pads, rotors and calipers are not stan- mended ones are used, the Vehicle Dy-
dard equipment or are extremely dete- namic Control system may not operate
riorated, the Vehicle Dynamic Control properly and the Vehicle Dynamic Con-
system may not operate properly and trol off indicator light may come on.
the Vehicle Dynamic Control off indica-
● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
tor light may come on.
not a substitute for winter tires or tire
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. chains on a snow covered road.
If suspension parts such as shock ab-
sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars
and bushings are not NISSAN approved
for your vehicle or are extremely dete-
riorated the Vehicle Dynamic Control
system may not operate properly. This WSD0170
could adversely affect vehicle handling
performance, and the VDC OFF indica- WARNING
tor light may come on.
● Always turn and look back before back-
● When driving on extremely inclined sur- ing up. The RSS is not a substitute for
faces such as higher banked corners, proper backing procedures.
the Vehicle Dynamic Control system
may not operate properly and the VDC ● Read and understand the limitations of
OFF indicator light may come on. Do the rear sonar system as contained in
not drive on these types of roads. this section. Inclement weather may af-
fect the function of the RSS; this may
● When driving on an unstable surface include reduced performance or a false
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or activation.
ramp, the Vehicle Dynamic Control off
indicator light may illuminate. This is ● This system is not designed to prevent
not a malfunction. Restart the engine contact with small or moving objects.
after driving onto a stable surface.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

● The system is designed as an aid to the will sound for only three seconds. Once the sys- FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
driver in detecting large stationary ob- tem detects an object approaching, the tone will
sound again. To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-
jects to help avoid damaging the ve- icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
hicle. The system will not detect small The RSS automatically turns on when the shift frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key
objects below the bumper, and may not selector lever is placed in R (Reverse) and the hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if so
detect objects close to the bumper or ignition is ON. The RSS OFF switch on the equipped).
on the ground. instrument panel allows the driver to turn the RSS
● If your vehicle sustains damage to the on and off. To turn the RSS off, the ignition must ANTI-FREEZE
rear bumper fascia, leaving it mis- be ON, and the shift selector lever in R (Reverse).
In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-
aligned or bent, the sensing zone may An indicator light on the switch will illuminate
perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the
be altered causing inaccurate measure- when the system is turned off. If the indicator light
anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.
ment of obstacles or false alarms. illuminates when the RSS is not turned off, it may
For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the
indicate a failure in the RSS.
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
The Rear Sonar System (RSS) sounds a tone to manual.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear
warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large
when the shift selector is in R (Reverse). The accumulations of dirt (do not clean the sensors BATTERY
system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it If the battery is not fully charged during extremely
mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular will affect the accuracy of the RSS. cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may
or moving objects. freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-
The RSS detects obstacles up to 6 feet (1.8 m) mum efficiency, the battery should be checked
from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-
area at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer to tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
the illustration for approximate zone coverage manual.
areas). As you move closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the tone increases. When the obstacle is
less than 10 inches (25.0 cm) away, the tone will
sound continuously. If the RSS detects a station-
ary or receding object further than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle, the tone


06/08/07—debbie ੭

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER 3. Tire chains may be used. For details, see ● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-
“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it- tion. Accelerate and slow down with
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti- yourself” section of this manual. care. If accelerating or downshifting too
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the
fast, the drive wheels will lose even
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT more traction.
For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the
It is recommended that the following items be ● Allow more stopping distance under
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
carried in the vehicle during winter: these conditions. Braking should be
manual.
● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove started sooner than on dry pavement.
TIRE EQUIPMENT ice and snow from the windows and wiper ● Allow greater following distances on
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to blades. slippery roads.
provide superior performance on dry pave- ● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the ● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
ment. However, the performance of these jack to give it firm support. These may appear on an otherwise
tires will be substantially reduced in snowy clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of
and icy conditions. If you operate your ve- ● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-
hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom- ● Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser- ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,
mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL voir tank. and avoid any sudden steering
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please maneuvers.
consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE ● Do not use the cruise control on slip-
size, speed rating and availability informa- pery roads.
tion. WARNING
● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded ● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
tires may be used. However, some U.S. very cold snow or ice can be slick and clear of the exhaust pipe and from
states and Canadian provinces prohibit their very hard to drive on. The vehicle will around your vehicle.
use. Check local, state and provincial laws have much less traction or “grip” under
before installing studded tires. these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until the road is salted or
Skid and traction capabilities of studded sanded.
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so To use the engine block heater:
equipped) 1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block
WARNING
heater cord.
● Do not use your engine block heater
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
with an ungrounded electrical system
grounded 3 wire, 3 pronged extension cord.
or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-
riously injured by an electrical shock if 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
you use an ungrounded connection. Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-
● Disconnect and properly store the en- volt AC (VAC) outlet.
gine block heater cord before starting 5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
the engine. Damage to the cord could for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside
result in an electrical shock and can temperatures, to properly warm the engine
cause serious injury. coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the
● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex- engine block heater on.
tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-
the extension cord into a Ground Fault erly store the cord to keep it away from
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded moving parts.
110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the
proper extension cord or a grounded
outlet can result in a fire or electrical
shock and cause serious personal
injury.
Engine block heaters are available through
NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature
starting. The engine block heater should be used
when the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) or
lower.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

MEMO


6 In case of emergency

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

06/08/07—debbie ੭

FLAT TIRE

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING WARNING ● Replacing tires with those not originally
SYSTEM (TPMS) ● If the low tire pressure warning light
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres- steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, ● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
sure of all tires except the spare. When the low reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road tire sealant into the tires, as this may
tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of to a safe location and stop the vehicle cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
your tires is significantly underinflated. If as soon as possible. Driving with under- sensors.
equipped, the system also displays pressure of inflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
all tires (except the spare tire) on the display
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-
screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is
could occur and may lead to an acci-
installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being low.
dent and could result in serious per-
driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will acti- sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for
vate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure Stopping the vehicle
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
warning light. This system will activate only when the recommended COLD tire pressure 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH shown on the Tire and Loading Informa- away from traffic.
(25 km/h). For more details, refer to tion label to turn the low tire pressure
“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders” 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
pressure information” in the “Display screen, possible. brake. Move the shift selector lever to P
heater, air conditioner and audio and phone sys- (Park).
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
tems” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- is replaced, tire pressure will not be
tem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section. 4. Turn off the engine.
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
will flash for approximately 1 minute. signal professional road assistance person-
The light will remain on after 1 minute. nel that you need assistance.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting. and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.

6-2 In case of emergency

06/08/07—debbie ੭

WARNING
● Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the CVT is shifted into P
(Park).
● Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-
sional road assistance.

WCE0044 LCE0074
Blocking wheels Getting the spare tire and tools
Place suitable blocks ᭺ at both the front and
1 Open the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire spare tire cover. Remove the jack ᭺ and wheel
1
᭺ to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
2 nut wrench ᭺ from the tool box. Remove the
2
jacked up. spare tire.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.

In case of emergency 6-3

06/08/07—debbie ੭

LCE0075 LCE0076 CE1089
Type A Type B Jacking up vehicle and removing the
damaged tire
WARNING
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-
essary to work under the vehicle, sup-
port it with safety stands.
● Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the
jack provided with your vehicle on other
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire change.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

● Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
● Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
● Never use blocks on or under the jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for vehicles with limited slip
differentials.
● Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack. LCE0020

● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off Always refer to the proper illustrations for the 2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
the ground. It may cause the vehicle to correct placement and jack-up points for your point as illustrated so the top of the jack
move. specific vehicle model and jack type. contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the two
Carefully read the caution label attached to notches in the front or the rear as shown.
the jack body and the following instruc- Also fit the groove of the jack head between
tions. the notches as shown.
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by The jack should be used on firm and
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut level ground.
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
until the tire is off the ground.
and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the
vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-
move the wheel nuts, and then remove the
tire.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
parked for three hours or more or driven
in the sequence illustrated (᭺, ᭺, ᭺, ᭺,
A B C D
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
᭺). Lower the vehicle completely.
E
COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire
WARNING and Loading Information label affixed to
● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly the driver side center pillar.
tightened wheel nuts can cause the After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD
wheel to become loose or come off. tire pressure, the display (if so equipped) of
This could cause an accident. the tire pressure information may show
● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel higher pressure than the COLD tire pres-
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts sure after the vehicle has been driven more
WCE0056 to become loose. than 1 mile (1.6 km). This is because the tire
Installing the spare tire pressure increases as the tire temperature
● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-
hicle has been driven for 600 miles rises. This does not indicate a system mal-
The spare tire is designed for emergency (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, function.
use. See specific instructions under the etc.). 5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-
ment in the vehicle.
nance and do-it-yourself” section of this As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts
manual. to the specified torque with a torque 6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor
wrench. carpeting over the damaged tire.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-
tween the wheel and hub. Wheel nut tightening torque: 7. Close the trunk.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten 80 ft-lb (108 N·m)
the wheel nuts finger tight.
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel specification at all times. It is recom-
nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
they are tight. specifications at each lubrication interval.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

JUMP STARTING

To start your engine with a booster battery, the ● Whenever working on or near a battery,
WARNING
instructions and precautions below must be fol- always wear suitable eye protectors (for
● Always make sure that the spare tire lowed. example, goggles or industrial safety
and jacking equipment are properly se- spectacles) and remove rings, metal
cured after use. Such items can become WARNING bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
dangerous projectiles in an accident or over the battery when jump starting.
sudden stop. ● If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in ● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
● The spare tire is designed for emer- severe injury or death. It could also battery. It could explode and cause se-
gency use. See specific instructions un- damage your vehicle. rious injury.
der the heading “Wheels and tires” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” ● Explosive hydrogen gas is always ● Your vehicle has an automatic engine
section of this manual. present in the vicinity of the battery. cooling fan. It could come on at any
Keep all sparks and flames away from time. Keep hands and other objects
the battery. away from it.
● Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-
rosive sulfuric acid solution which can
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
come into contact with anything, imme-
diately flush the contacted area with
water.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
● The booster battery must be rated at 12
volts. Use of an improperly rated battery
can damage your vehicle.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

● Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine com-
partment and that the cable clamps do
not contact any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and
let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-
hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-
gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
WCE0054 more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so not start right away, turn the key off and
WARNING wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
equipped). Cover the battery with an old
Always follow the instructions below. cloth to reduce explosion hazard. 7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-
Failure to do so could result in damage to nect the negative cable and then the positive
the charging system and cause personal 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-
cable.
injury. lustrated (᭺, ᭺, ᭺, ᭺).
A B C D
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, CAUTION sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
position the two vehicles to bring their bat- the vent holes as it may be contaminated
● Always connect positive (ϩ) to positive
teries near each other. with corrosive acid.
(ϩ) and negative (Ϫ) to body ground (for
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. example, strut mounting bolt, engine
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-
lector lever to P (Park). Switch off all unnec-
essary electrical systems (lights, heater, air
conditioner, etc.).

06/08/07—debbie ੭

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

Do not start the engine by pushing. If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
CAUTION you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-
CVT models cannot be push-started or noise, etc. take the following steps. ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not
tow-started. Attempting to do so may open the hood further until no steam or
cause transmission damage. WARNING coolant can be seen.
● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle 4. Open the engine hood.
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a vehicle fire. WARNING
● To avoid the danger of being scalded, If steam or water is coming from the en-
never remove the radiator cap while the gine, stand clear to prevent getting
engine is still hot. When the radiator burned.
cap is removed, pressurized hot water
will spurt out, possibly causing serious 5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
injury. looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
● Do not open the hood if steam is com- running. The radiator hoses and radiator
ing out. should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-
the parking brake and move the shift lever to gine.
P (Park).
WARNING
Do not stop the engine.
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the jewelry or clothing to come into contact
windows, move the heater or air conditioner with, or get caught in, engine belts or the
temperature control to maximum hot and fan engine cooling fan. The engine cooling
control to high speed. fan can start at any time.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool- When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in For information about towing your vehicle behind
ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank Canada) and local regulations for towing must be a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”
with the engine running. Add coolant to the followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam- in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail- tion of this manual.
Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-
dealer. tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to your
vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have
the service operator carefully read the following
precautions:

WARNING
● Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
● Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION
● When towing, make sure that the trans-
mission, axles, steering system and
powertrain are in working condition. If
any unit is damaged, dollies must be
used.
● Always attach safety chains before
towing.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

CAUTION
● Never tow CVT models with the front
wheels on the ground or four wheels on
the ground (forward or backward), as
this may cause serious and expensive
damage to the transmission. If it is nec-
essary to tow the vehicle with the rear
wheels raised always use towing dollies
under the front wheels.
● When towing with the front wheels on
towing dollies:
– Turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by turning
the ignition key to the LOCK position.
This may damage the steering lock
mechanism.
– Move the gearshift lever to the N
(Neutral) position.
ACE0511 SCE0199A
● When towing CVT models with the rear
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY wheels on the ground (if you do not use
NISSAN towing dollies): Always release the
parking brake.
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
CAUTION
an area around the front tires.
● Tow chains or cables must be attached
only to the main structural members of 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body ward.
will be damaged. ● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
● Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free and D (Drive).
a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. ● Apply the accelerator as little as possible
Never tow the vehicle using the vehicle to maintain the rocking motion.
tie downs or recovery hooks.
● Release the accelerator pedal before
● Always pull the cable straight out from shifting between R (Reverse) and D
the front or rear of the vehicle. Never (Drive).
pull the vehicle at an angle.
● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55
WCE0133 ● Pulling devices should be routed so km/h).
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck they do not touch any part of the sus-
pension, steering, brake or cooling 5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a few
vehicle) systems. tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.
Front or Rear (if so equipped) ● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas
straps are not recommended for use in
WARNING vehicle towing or recovery.
● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
● Do not spin your tires at high speed. use the following procedure:
This could cause them to explode and 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System
result in serious injury. Parts of your (if so equipped).
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged. 2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Most common factors contributing to vehicle
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Environmental factors influence the rate of
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

06/08/07—debbie ੭

CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve- the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
CAUTION
hicle, it is important to take proper care of it. must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the
● Do not use car washes that use acid in drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your the detergent. Some car washes, espe- open. Spray water under the body and in the
vehicle as soon as you can: cially brushless ones, use some acid for wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
● after a rainfall to prevent possible damage cleaning. The acid may react with some road salt.
from acid rain. plastic vehicle components, causing
them to crack. This could affect their A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to
● after driving on coastal roads. appearance, and also could cause them avoid water spots.
not to function properly. Always check WAXING
● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-
with your car wash to confirm that acid
pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get is not used. Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
on the paint surface. helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is
● Do not wash the vehicle with strong recommended to remove built-up wax residue
● when dust or mud builds up on the surface. household soap, strong chemical deter- and to avoid a weathered appearance before
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle gents, gasoline or solvents. re-applying wax.
inside a garage or in a covered area. ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
light or while the vehicle body is hot, as proper product.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
the surface may become water-spotted.
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body ● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-
cover. ● Avoid using tight-napped or rough
ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface wax.
must be taken when removing
when putting on or removing the body caked-on dirt or other foreign sub- ● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cover. stances so the paint surface is not cutting compounds or cleaners that may
scratched or damaged. damage the vehicle finish.
WASHING
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of
water. on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild
finish or leave swirl marks.
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
(never hot) water.
7-2 Appearance and care

06/08/07—debbie ੭

REMOVING SPOTS Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, become coated with a film after the vehicle is
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or
cloth will easily remove this film.
staining. Special cleaning products are available
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory
store. CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows,
UNDERBODY do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in cleaners. They could damage the electri-
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and cal conductors, radio antenna elements or
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un- rear window defroster elements.
derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe- LAI0008
riod and again in the spring, the underseal must ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS
be checked and, if necessary, retreated. GLASS
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier ened in a mild soap solution, especially during
to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed winter months in areas where road salt is used. If
first. not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.
Be careful when removing the high-mounted
CAUTION
stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the
high-mounted stop light wires. Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
To remove the high-mounted stop light:
● Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
᭺
1 Push toward rear of vehicle. acid or alkali contents to clean the
wheels.
᭺
2 Lift to remove.
The high-mounted stop light must be properly
reinstalled before driving your vehicle.
Appearance and care 7-3

06/08/07—debbie ੭

CLEANING INTERIOR

● Do not apply wheel cleaners to the ● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
wheels when they are hot. The wheel prevent it from entering the tire trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
temperature should be the same as am- tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
bient temperature. remove). leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-
● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
● Rinse the wheel to completely remove dry, soft cloth.
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-
cleaner is applied. pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves. Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom- maintain the appearance of the leather.
CHROME PARTS mended by tire dressing manufacturer. Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non- facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish. tectors contain chemicals that may stain or
TIRE DRESSINGS bleach the seat material.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the meter and gauge lens.
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-
ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may CAUTION
react with the coating and form a compound. This ● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-
compound may come off the tire while driving and lar material.
stain the vehicle paint.
● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the damaging to leather surfaces and
following precautions: should be removed promptly. Do not
● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat- use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,
ing on the tire dissolves more easily with an oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
oil-based tire dressing. gents or ammonia-based cleaners as
they may damage the leather’s natural
finish.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

● Never use fabric protectors unless rec- SEAT BELTS
ommended by the manufacturer. The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.
meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam- Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade
age the lens cover. before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”
in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-
FLOOR MATS tal restraint system” section of this manual.
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-
tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it WARNING
easier to clean the interior. No matter what Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
mats are used, be sure they are fitted for retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
your vehicle and are properly positioned in chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,
the footwell to prevent interference with since these materials may severely
pedal operation. Mats should be maintained WAI0006 weaken the seat belt webbing.
with regular cleaning and replaced if they be- Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s side
come excessively worn.
only)
This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to
act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor
mats have been specially designed for your ve-
hicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has a
grommet hole incorporated in it. Position the mat
by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the
floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in
the footwell.
Periodically check to make certain the mats are
properly positioned.

Appearance and care 7-5

06/08/07—debbie ੭

CORROSION PROTECTION

MOST COMMON FACTORS Temperature CAUTION
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro- ● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
CORROSION sion to those parts which are not well ventilated. bris from the passenger compartment
by washing it out with a hose. Remove
● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt Air pollution dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas. Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air ● Never allow water or other liquids to
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler- come in contact with electronic compo-
● Damage to paint and other protective coat- ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel- nents inside the vehicle as this may
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or erates the disintegration of paint surfaces. damage them.
minor traffic accidents.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS FROM CORROSION extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF ● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the and deterioration of underbody components
CORROSION vehicle clean. such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
Moisture ● Always check for minor damage to the paint
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
and repair it as soon as possible.
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve- periodically.
hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. ● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation. For additional protection against rust and corro-
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside sion, which may be required in some areas, con-
the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to ● Check the underbody for accumulation of sult a NISSAN dealer.
avoid floor panel corrosion. sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing and where
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is
used.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Brake pad wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . 8-11
Intelligent Key battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39

06/08/07—debbie ੭

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have Performing general maintenance checks requires During the normal day-to-day operation of the
minimum maintenance requirements with long minimal mechanical skill and only a few general vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
service intervals to save you both time and automotive tools. formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
money. However, some day-to-day and regular These checks or inspections can be done by you, you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
maintenance is essential to maintain your NIS- a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
SAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as its dealer. NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
emission and engine performance. should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
Where to go for service repairs are required.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general If maintenance service is required or your vehicle When performing any checks or maintenance
maintenance, is performed. appears to malfunction, have the systems work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-
checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.
tions” later in this section.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper
who are kept up-to-date with the latest service EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte- information through technical bulletins, service MAINTENANCE ITEMS
nance chain. tips, and in-dealership training programs. They
are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve- Additional information on the following
Scheduled maintenance items with “*” is found later in this section.
hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather
For your convenience, both required and optional than after they have worked on it.
scheduled maintenance items are described and
Outside the vehicle
listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
The maintenance items listed here should be
Guide.” You must refer to that guide to ensure service department performs the best job to meet
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —
that necessary maintenance is performed on your specified.
in a reliable and economical way.
NISSAN at regular intervals.
Doors and engine hood Check that the doors
General maintenance and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure
General maintenance includes those items which that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,
should be checked during normal day-to-day op- latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.
eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op- Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the
eration. It is your responsibility to perform these hood from opening when the primary latch is
maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed. released.

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

06/08/07—debbie ੭

When driving in areas using road salt or other alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-
needed. ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the
Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail ● For additional information regarding tires,
NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
away from the pedal.
operating properly and installed securely. Also (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
check headlight aim. the Warranty Information Booklet . Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, basis. Check the windshield at least every six Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam- P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly
necessary. aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely
facility. with the selector lever in the P (Park) position
Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every
without applying any brakes.
7,500 miles (12,000 km). Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or
wear if they do not wipe properly. Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-
Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often
tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held
and always prior to long distance trips. If neces- Inside the vehicle on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake
sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the
The maintenance items listed here should be applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully
checked on a regular basis, such as when per- see a NISSAN dealer.
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve- Seats Check seat position controls such as seat
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) hicle, etc. adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they
transmitter components Replace the grom-
Additional information on the following operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in
met seal, valve core and cap of the transmitter in
items with an “*” is found later in this sec- every position. Check that the head restraints
vehicles equipped with TPMS at tire replacement
tion. move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so
when reaching the wear limit of the tires.
equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.
Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth
operation and make sure the pedal does not bind Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt
should pull to either side while driving on a
or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel from the pedal. and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

06/08/07—debbie ੭

and are installed securely. Check the belt web- Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. when the engine is cold. hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
connections.
Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer- Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts
ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-
steering or strange noises. posed to corrosive substances such as those
Engine oil level* Check the level after parking used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
Warning lights and chimes Make sure all the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off. important to remove these substances from the
warning lights and chimes are operating properly. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor
back into the oil pan. pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the
Windshield wiper and washer* Check that
Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose end of winter, the underbody should be thor-
the wipers and washer operate properly and that
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas
the wipers do not streak.
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See
Windshield defroster Check that the air exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust the “Appearance and care” section of this
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the manual.
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and Windshield washer fluid* Check that there is
air conditioner. driving” section of this manual. adequate fluid in the reservoir.
Under the hood and vehicle Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,
water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
The maintenance items listed here should be been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
checked periodically (for example, each time you air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
check the engine oil or refuel). notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,
check for the cause and have it corrected imme-
Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It
diately.
should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-
hicles operated in high temperatures or under Power steering fluid level* and lines Check
severe conditions require frequent checks of the the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine
battery fluid level. off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,
cracks, etc.
Brake fluid levels* Make sure that the brake
fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on Radiator and hoses Check the front of the
the reservoir. radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

06/08/07—debbie ੭

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or maintenance engine is not running. To avoid injury, CAUTION
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent always disconnect the negative battery
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to cable before working near the fan. ● Do not work under the hood while the
the vehicle. The following are general precau- engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
tions which should be closely observed. ● If you must work with the engine run- wait until it cools down.
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans, belts ● Avoid contact with used engine oil and
WARNING coolant. Improperly disposed engine
and any other moving parts.
● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap- oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
● It is advisable to secure or remove any fluids can damage the environment. Al-
ply the parking brake securely and loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle ways conform to local regulations for
such as rings, watches, etc. before disposal of vehicle fluid.
from moving. Move the shift selector working on your vehicle.
lever to P (Park). This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
● Always wear eye protection whenever
● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or you work on your vehicle. gives instructions regarding only those items
LOCK position when performing any which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
● If you must run the engine in an en-
parts replacement or repairs. closed space such as a garage, be sure A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-
● Never leave the engine or automatic there is proper ventilation for exhaust able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-
transmission related component har- gases to escape. der information” in the “Technical and consumer
nesses disconnected while the ignition ● Never get under the vehicle while it is information” section of this manual.
switch is in the ON position. supported only by a jack. If it is neces- You should be aware that incomplete or improper
● Never connect or disconnect the battery sary to work under the vehicle, support servicing may result in operating difficulties or
or any transistorized component while it with safety stands. excessive emissions, and could affect warranty
the ignition switch is in the ON position. ● Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,
away from the fuel tank and battery. have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic engine cooling fan. It may come on ● On gasoline engine models, the fuel
at any time without warning, even if the filter or fuel lines should be serviced by
ignition key is in the OFF position and the a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines
are under high pressure even when the
engine is off.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS

1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Battery
6. Fuse/Fusible link box
7. Engine oil dipstick
8. Radiator cap
9. Drive belt location
10. Fuse block
11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
12. Engine coolant reservoir
NOTE:
Engine cover removed for clarity.

WDI0525


06/08/07—debbie ੭

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
CAUTION
with Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti- When adding or replacing coolant, be sure
freeze and coolant protection. The anti-freeze to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life
solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Antifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalent
Additional engine cooling system additives are with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-
not necessary. freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled
water. The use of other types of coolant
solutions or coolant colors, such as or-
WARNING
ange, may damage the engine cooling
● Never remove the radiator or coolant system.
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool Outside temperature Genuine Demineral-
down. Serious burns could be caused down to NISSAN ized or dis-
by high pressure fluid escaping from Long Life tilled water
Antifreeze/ WDI0532
the radiator. See precautions in “If your °C °F
vehicle overheats” found in the “In case Coolant or CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
equivalent
of emergency” section of this manual. LEVEL
-35 -30 50% 50%
● The radiator is equipped with a pres- Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en- the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
gine damage, use only a genuine the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the
NISSAN radiator cap. reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the
radiator when the engine is cold. If there is
insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and also add
it to the reservoir up to the MAX level.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN
dealer.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

ENGINE OIL

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.
The service procedure can be found in the
NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheat-
ing.

WARNING
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the en-
gine is hot.
● Never remove the radiator cap when the LDI0329 WDI0214
engine is hot. Serious burns could be CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
caused by high pressure fluid escaping level. It should be between the H (High) and
from the radiator. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply L (Low) marks ᭺. This is the normal oper-
B
the parking brake.
● Avoid direct skin contact with used ating oil level range. If the oil level is below
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches the L (Low) mark ᭺, remove the oil filler cap
A
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner operating temperature. and pour recommended oil through the
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 opening. Do not overfill ᭺. C

● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil- minutes for the oil to drain back into 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
dren and pets. the oil pan.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re- maintenance intervals or during the
Check your local regulations. insert it all the way. break-in period, depending on the severity
of operating conditions.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
CAUTION
minutes .
Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-
erating the engine with an insufficient 4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug
amount of oil can damage the engine, and ᭺ (under the body).
A
such damage is not covered by warranty. 5. Remove the oil filler cap ᭺ (inside the en-
B
gine compartment) by turning it counter-
clockwise.
6. Remove the drain plug ᭺ with a wrench by
A
turning it counterclockwise and completely
drain the oil.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and
replace it at this time. See “Changing engine
oil filter” later in this section.

WARNING
● Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
● Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
LDI0641
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
● Keep used engine oil out of reach of
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply children.
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

CAUTION
minutes . Check the oil level with the dip-
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine stick. Add engine oil if necessary.
oil may be hot.
● Waste oil must be disposed of prop-
erly.
● Check your local regulations.
7. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with
a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torque:
22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)
LDI0642
8. Refill engine with recommended oil through
the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
cap securely.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
See “Capacities and recommended the parking brake.
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-
sumer information” section of this manual for 2. Turn the engine off.
drain and refill capacity. 3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter ᭺.
A
The drain and refill capacity depends on the 4. Loosen the oil filter ᭺ with an oil filter
A
oil temperature and drain time. Use these wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then
specifications for reference only. Always use remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.
the dipstick to determine when the proper
amount of oil is in the engine. CAUTION
9. Start the engine. Check for leakage around Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re- oil may be hot.
quired.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE POWER STEERING FLUID
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with
WARNING
a clean rag.
● Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid
Be sure to remove any old gasket material
NS-2. Do not mix with other fluids.
remaining on the sealing surface of the en-
gine. ● Using transmission fluid other than
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean damage the CVT, which is not covered
engine oil. by the NISSAN new vehicle limited
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance warranty.
is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.
When checking or replacement is required, we
8. Start the engine and check for leakage recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
WDI0256
minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if
necessary. The fluid level should be checked using the HOT
MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir
at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -
80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the
power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-
tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).
If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine
NISSAN PSF. Remove the cap and fill through
the opening.

CAUTION
● DO NOT OVERFILL.
● Recommended fluid is Genuine
NISSAN PSF or equivalent.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

BRAKE FLUID WINDOW WASHER FLUID

For further brake fluid specification information,
refer to “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.

WARNING
● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake system.
The use of improper fluids can damage
the brake system and affect the vehi-
cle’s stopping ability.
● Be sure to clean the filler cap before
removing. LDI0079 WDI0533
BRAKE FLUID WINDOW WASHER FLUID
CAUTION
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the RESERVOIR
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-
fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Add window washer fluid when the low window
spilled, immediately wash the surface
Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT
with water. washer fluid warning light comes on (if so
3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added
equipped).
frequently, the system should be checked by a
NISSAN dealer. To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the
cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window
washer fluid into the tank opening.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions for the mixture ratio.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

BATTERY

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving ● Keep the battery surface clean and dry. ● When working on or near a battery, al-
conditions require an increased amount of win- Clean the battery with a solution of baking ways wear suitable eye protection and
dow washer fluid. soda and water. remove all jewelry.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind- ● Make certain the terminal connections are ● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-
shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti- clean and securely tightened. cessories contain lead and lead com-
freeze or equivalent. pounds. Wash hands after handling.
● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
CAUTION longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery ● Keep battery out of the reach of
terminal cable to prevent discharge. children.
● Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for window washer solution. WARNING
This may result in damage to the paint.
● Do not expose the battery to flames or
● Do not fill the window washer reservoir electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener-
tank with washer fluid concentrates at ated by the battery is explosive. Do not
full strength. Some methyl alcohol allow battery fluid to contact your skin,
based washer fluid concentrates may eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. After
permanently stain the grille if spilled touching a battery or battery cap, do not
while filling the window washer reser- touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly
voir tank. wash your hands. If the acid contacts
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
water to the manufacturer’s recom- flush with water for at least 15 minutes
mended levels before pouring the fluid and seek medical attention.
into the window washer reservoir tank. ● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
Do not use the window washer reservoir the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
tank to mix the washer fluid concen- cause a higher load on the battery
trate and water. which can generate heat, reduce bat-
tery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”
in the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual. If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.

WDI0224
1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriver
as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery
case.

LDI0302
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level up to the bottom of
the filler opening. Do not overfill.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

DRIVE BELT SPARK PLUGS

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-
tion and tension in accordance with the
maintenance schedule found in the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

WDI0644 SDI1895
1. Power steering fluid pump REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
2. Crankshaft
3. Idler pulley Iridium-tipped spark plugs
4. Generator It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped ᭺
A
5. Air conditioner spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-
WARNING low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN
Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service
LOCK position before servicing drive belt. iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-
The engine could rotate unexpectedly. ping.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual ● Always replace spark plugs with rec-
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is ommended or equivalent ones.
in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced
or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

AIR CLEANER

WARNING WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are ● Operating the engine with the air
off and that the parking brake is engaged cleaner removed can cause you or oth-
securely. ers to be burned. The air cleaner not
only cleans the air, it stops the flame if
CAUTION the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and
the engine backfires, you could be
Be sure to use the correct socket to re- burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner
move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket removed, and be careful when working
can damage the spark plugs. on the engine with the air cleaner
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN removed.
dealer for assistance. ● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
LDI0336 cleaner removed. Doing so could result
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and in serious injury.
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
nance Guide.” When replacing the filter, wipe the The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-
inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the borne dust and pollen particles and reduces
cover with a damp cloth. some objectionable outside odors. The filter is
located behind the glove box. Refer to the
To remove the air cleaner filter: “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for
᭺
1 Loosen the screw. change intervals.

᭺
2 Disconnect the electrical connector. To replace the filter, perform the following proce-
dure:
᭺
3 Unlatch the clips and remove the air cleaner
cover. Remove the air cleaner filter.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

LDI0323 LDI0324 LDI0325
1. Remove the 2 lower glove box hinge pins. 2. Remove the filter cover from the intake unit NOTE:
Remove the glove box from the opening and by disengaging the 2 hook tabs at the bot-
The filter is marked “UP” with an arrow. The
let it hang by the cord. tom of the cover.
end of the filter with the arrow should face
the rear of the vehicle.
3. Slide the filter into the housing.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

NOTE:
Make sure the filter sits on top of the 2
supporting tabs on the housing.
4. Replace the cover by inserting the upper
tabs inside the housing slot and pushing the
hook tabs until they snap on to the housing
lip.
5. Install the glove box door.
6. Fill out the date information on the small
replacement label and attach it to the glove
box lid.

LDI0157


06/08/07—debbie ੭

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

WDI0194

CLEANING 4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
CAUTION
arm until it clicks into place.
If your windshield is not clear after using the Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters age the windshield and impair driver CAUTION
when running, wax or other material may be on vision.
the blade or windshield. ● After wiper blade replacement, return
REPLACING the wiper arm to its original position;
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer otherwise it may be damaged when the
solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. hood is opened.
clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear
water. ᭺
1 Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield. ● Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked ᭺
2 Push the release tab, then move the wiper aged from wind pressure.
in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then blade down the wiper arm to remove.
rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-
shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades
᭺
3 Remove the wiper blade.
and using the wiper, replace the blades.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

BRAKES

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the Proper brake inspection intervals should
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer. be followed. For more information regarding
brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-
SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting vice and Maintenance Guide”.
brakes.
The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust
every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system
check if the brake pedal height does not
return to normal.

BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-
placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-
ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
WDI0337 checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator
Be careful not to let anything get into the washer sound is heard.
nozzle ᭺. This may cause clogging or improper
A
windshield washer operation. If something gets Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-
into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may
pin ᭺.
B be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the
function or performance of the brake system.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

FUSES

LDI0455 LDI0457 LDI0327
Two types of fuses are used. Type A is used in the If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse, ENGINE COMPARTMENT
fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type B is the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse
used in the passenger compartment fuse box. pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not CAUTION
affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the
Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.
are stored in the passenger compartment fuse amperage rating than specified on the
box. Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under- fuse box cover. This could damage the
hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the electrical system or cause a fire.
Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-
underhood fuse boxes.
partment and passenger compartment fuse
If any electrical equipment does not come on,
boxes.
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the
tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The
fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse
block in the passenger compartment.

WDI0452
5. If the fuse is open ᭺, replace it with a new
A
fuse ᭺.B

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
links. If any of these fusible links are melted,
replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

LDI0328 WDI0452

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Type A
4. If the fuse is open ᭺, replace it with an
A
CAUTION equivalent good fuse ᭺.
B

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower 5. Push the fuse box cover to install.
amperage rating than specified on the 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
fuse box cover. This could damage the system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
electrical system or cause a fire. dealer.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-
lows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-
gent Key.
2. Insert a small screwdriver ᭺ into the slit ᭺
A B
of the corner and twist it to separate the
upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to
protect the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-
LDI0456 lent.
Type B ● Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-
tric terminals as doing so could cause a
malfunction.
● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.
● Make sure that the + side faces the bot-
tom of the case.

SDI1867


06/08/07—debbie ੭

LIGHTS

Operation is subject to the following two HEADLIGHTS
conditions: (1) This device may not cause Replacing the xenon headlight bulb
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undes- WARNING
ired operation of the device. ᏘHIGH VOLTAGE
When xenon headlights are on, they pro-
duce a high voltage. To prevent an electric
shock, never attempt to modify or disas-
semble. Always have your xenon head-
lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. For
additional information, see “Headlight
and turn signal switch” in the “Instru-
WDI0535 ments and controls” section.
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated ᭺ ᭺.
C D Replacing the halogen headlight bulb
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation. The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which
See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-
replacement. cause the headlight assembly must be removed
from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your
FCC Notice: NISSAN dealer.
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli- CAUTION
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment. ● Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is
This device complies with Part 15 of the necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.
Canada.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

● Do not leave the headlight assembly Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
open without a bulb installed for a long exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, temperature difference between the inside and
etc. entering the headlight body may the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not
affect bulb performance. Remove the a malfunction. If large drops of water collect
bulb from the headlight assembly just inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.
before a replacement bulb is installed.
● Only touch the base when handling the
bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.
Touching the glass could significantly
affect bulb life and/or headlight
performance.
● High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is scratched
or the bulb is dropped.
● Use the same number and wattage as
originally installed:
Low beam:
Wattage: 65
Bulb no.: 9005LL*
High beam:
Wattage: 65
Bulb no.: 9005LL*
*: Always check with the Parts Depart-
ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latest
parts information.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

Headlight assembly
High/low (Halogen) 65 9005LL
High/low (Xenon) (special) D2S
Park/Turn 27/8 4157NAK
Cornering 27 3156K
Front fog light 55 H11
Front personal/map lights 3.4 —
Glove box light 3.4 158
Vanity mirror light 2.1 —
Step light 3.8 194
Rear personal lamps 8 —
Rear console box light 5 W5W
High-mounted stop light (Type A) 5 W5W
High-mounted stop light (Type B) — LED
Trunk light 3.4 158
Rear combination light
Tail/Stop/Turn 27/5 3057K
Backup (reversing) 13 912
Sidemarker 5 W5W
License plate light 5 168

* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

1. Headlight assembly
2. Map light
3. Rear personal lights
4. Fog light
5. Step light
6. High-mounted stop light (Type A)
7. Trunk light
8. High-mounted stop light (Type B)
9. License plate light
10. Rear combination light

WDI0534


06/08/07—debbie ੭

WDI0263 LDI0338 LDI0339

Replacement procedures Front personal/map lights – Type A Front personal/map lights – Type B
Use a cloth ᭺ to protect the housing.
1 Use a cloth ᭺ to protect the housing.
1
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp
and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation


06/08/07—debbie ੭

WDI0340 LDI0341
Vanity mirror light Step light
1 Use a cloth ᭺ to protect the housing.
1

WDI0342
Rear personal light
1


06/08/07—debbie ੭

WHEELS AND TIRES

If you have a flat tire, see the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It
monitors tire pressure of all tires except
the spare. When the low tire pressure
warning light is lit, one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. If
WDI0343 equipped, the system also displays pres-
Trunk light sure of all tires (except the spare tire) on
the display screen by sending a signal
from a sensor that is installed in each
wheel.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
WDI0344 (25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-
High-mounted stop light (if so equipped) tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example a flat tire while driving).
For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-
sure warning light” in the “Instruments and
controls” section, “Tire pressure informa-
tion” in the “Display screen, heater, air

06/08/07—debbie ੭

conditioner and audio and phone sys- The tire pressures should be checked WARNING
tems” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring when the tires are cold. The tires are
System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driv- considered COLD after the vehicle has ● Improperly inflated tires can fail
ing” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In case been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven suddenly and cause an accident.
of emergency” section. less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate ● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
speeds. (GVWR) is located on the
Tire inflation pressure F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-
If the tires are used at speeds above 100 tion label. The vehicle weight ca-
Check the tire pressures (including the
mph (162 km/h) where it is legal to do so pacity is indicated on the Tire and
spare) often and always prior to long dis-
(on a race track for example), the cold tire Loading Information label (if so
tance trips. The recommended tire pres-
inflation pressure must be increased. Re- equipped). Do not load your ve-
sure specifications are shown on the
fer to ЉChecking tire pressureЉ later in this hicle beyond this capacity. Over-
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label loading your vehicle may result in
section.
or the Tire and Loading Information label reduced tire life, unsafe operat-
under the ЉCold Tire PressureЉ heading. Set the tire pressure to the normal cold ing conditions due to premature
The Tire and Loading Information label is tire inflation pressure when the vehicle tire failure, or unfavorable han-
affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire speed or load is reduced. dling characteristics and could
pressures should be checked regularly also lead to a serious accident.
Incorrect tire pressure, including un- Loading beyond the specified ca-
because: der inflation, may adversely affect pacity may also result in failure of
● Most tires naturally lose air over time. tire life and vehicle handling. other vehicle components.
● Tires can lose air suddenly when ● Before taking a long trip, or
driven over potholes or other objects whenever you heavily load your
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge
parking. to ensure that the tire pressures
are at the specified level.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

● Do not drive your vehicle over 85
MPH (137 km/h) unless it is
equipped with high speed rated
tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH
(137 km/h) may result in tire fail-
ure, loss of control and possible
injury.
● Increase the cold tire inflation
pressure as indicated in ؆Check-
ing tire pressure؆ later in this sec-
tion when using the tires speci-
fied by NISSAN above 100 MPH
(162 km/h) where it is legal to do WDI0509
so (on a race track for example).
Failure to increase the cold tire Tire and loading information label ᭺
4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
inflation pressure may result in this pressure when the tires are cold.
tire failure, loss of control and ᭺
1 Seating capacity: The maximum num- Tires are considered COLD after the
possible injury. After such use, ber of occupants that can be seated vehicle has been parked for 3 or more
readjust tire pressure. in the vehicle. hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
● For additional information re- ᭺
2 Vehicle load limit: See loading infor- km) at moderate speeds. The recom-
garding tires, refer to “Important mation in the “Technical and con- mended cold tire inflation is set by the
Tire Safety Information” (US) or sumer information” section. manufacturer to provide the best bal-
“Tire Safety Information” ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor- ᭺
3 Original tire size: The size of the tires driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the
mation Booklet. originally installed on the vehicle at vehicle’s GVWR.
the factory.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

᭺
5 Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” later 4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
in this section. stem and compare to the specifica-
tion shown on the Tire and Loading
᭺
6 Spare tire size (if so equipped).
Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of
the valve stem briefly with the tip of
the gauge stem to release pressure.
Recheck the pressure and add or
release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
LDI0393 7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
Checking tire pressure including the spare.
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press too
hard or force the valve stem side-
ways, or air will escape. If the hissing
sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard while checking the pressure,
reposition the gauge to eliminate this
leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

Size Cold Tire Inflation High Speed/
Pressure Maximum Load
Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
P225/55R17 95V 230 kPa, 33 PSI 240 kPa, 35 PSI
Front Original Tire
Rear Original Tire
Spare Tire T145/80*17 420 kPa, 60 PSI N/A
*: “R” or “D” depending on tire manufacturer
WDI0394
Example
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information iden-
tifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also pro-
vides the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in case of a
recall.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.

WDI0395
Example
᭺ Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)
1 4. R: The ЉRЉ stands for radial.
1. P: The ЉPЉ indicates the tire is de- 5. Two-digit number (15): This number
signed for passenger vehicles (not all is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
tires have this information). 6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This
2. Three-digit number (215): This num- number is the tire’s load index. It is a
ber gives the width in millimeters of measurement of how much weight
the tire from sidewall edge to side- each tire can support. You may not
wall edge. find this information on all tires be-
cause it is not required by law.
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.

06/08/07—debbie ੭

᭺ Tire ply composition and material
3

The number of layers or plies of rubber-
coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-
ers also must indicate the materials in the
tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
᭺ Maximum permissible inflation pres-
4
sure
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should be put in the tire. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible in-
WDI0396 flation pressure.
Example
᭺ TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
2 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code ᭺ Maximum load rating
5

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX (Optional) This number indicates the maximum load
XXXX) 5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac- in kilograms and pounds that can be car-
ture ried by the tire. When replacing the tires
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the ЉDepart- on the vehicle, always use a tire that has
ment Of Transportation.Љ The symbol 6. Four numbers represent the week the same load rating as the factory in-
can be placed above, below or to the and year the tire was built. For ex- stalled tire.
left or right of Tire Identification Num- ample, the numbers 3103 means the
ber. 31st week of 2003. If these numbers ᭺ Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
6

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s are missing, then look on the other Indicates whether the tire requires an in-
identification mark sidewall of the tire. ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

06/09/07—cathy ੭

᭺ The word “radial”
7 TYPES OF TIRES Summer tires
The word “radial” is shown if the tire has WARNING
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models
radial structure. to provide superior performance on dry roads.
● When changing or replacing tires, be Summer tire performance is substantially re-
᭺ Manufacturer or brand name
8 sure all four tires are of the same type duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
Manufacturer or brand name is shown. construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information about If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
Other Tire-related Terminology conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
tire type, size, speed rating and
In addition to the many terms that are availability. SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.
defined throughout this section, Intended ● Replacement tires may have a lower
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that speed rating than the factory equipped Snow tires
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering tires, and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
model name molding that is higher or original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
deeper than the same molding on the ● For additional information regarding adversely affect the safety and handling of your
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In- vehicle.
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out- formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa- Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings
tire that has a particular side that must tion Booklet. than factory equipped tires and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-
always face outward when mounted on a ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
All season tires
vehicle.
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod- If you install snow tires, they must be the same
els to provide good performance all year, includ- size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
four wheels.
ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires
on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow may be used. However, some U.S. states and
traction than All Season tires and may be more Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check
appropriate in some areas. local, state and provincial laws before installing

06/08/07—debbie ੭

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to
studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. must be secured or removed to prevent the pos-
sibility of whipping action damage to the fenders
TIRE CHAINS or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive
CAUTION at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may
be damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor-
Tire chains/cables should not be installed
mance may be adversely affected.
on P245/45R18 size tires. Installation of
the tire chains/cables on P245/45R18 size Tire chains must be installed only on the
tires will cause damage to the vehicle. If front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
you plan to use tire chains/cables, you
should install P225/55R17 size tires on Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE
your vehicle. ONLY spare tire.
WDI0258
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to
location. Check the local laws before installing
chains in such conditions can cause damage to CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure some overstress. Tire rotation
they are the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to the chain NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de- gency” section of this manual for tire re-
signed to meet the minimum clearances between placing procedures.
the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or
body component required to accommodate the As soon as possible, tighten the
use of a winter traction device (tire chains or wheel nuts to the specified torque
cables). The minimum clearances are determined with a torque wrench.
using the factory equipped tires. Other types may
damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when

06/08/07—debbie ੭

Wheel nut tightening torque: ● The original tires have built-in
83 ft-lb (112 N·m) tread wear indicators. When the
The wheel nuts must be kept tight- wear indicators are visible, the
ened to specifications at all times. It tire(s) should be replaced.
is recommended that wheel nuts be ● Tires degrade with age and use.
tightened to specification at each Have tires, including the spare,
tire rotation interval. over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
WARNING some tire damage may not be ob-
vious. Replace the tires as neces-
● After rotating the tires, check and sary to prevent tire failure and
adjust the tire pressure. possible personal injury.
● Retighten the wheel nuts when WDI0259 ● Improper service of the spare tire
the vehicle has been driven for 1. Wear indicator may result in serious personal in-
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in 2. Location mark jury. If it is necessary to repair the
cases of a flat tire, etc.). spare tire, contact a NISSAN
Tire wear and damage dealer.
● Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation. WARNING ● For additional information re-
● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
● Tires should be periodically in- Tire Safety Information” (US) or
garding tires, refer to “Important spected for wear, cracking, bulg-
Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”
ing or objects caught in the tread. (Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
“Tire Safety Information” If excessive wear, cracks, bulging
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor- mation Booklet.
or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)
mation Booklet. should be replaced.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

Replacing wheels and tires ● If the wheels are changed for any rea- ● Do not install a damaged or deformed
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread son, always replace with wheels which wheel or tire even if it has been re-
have the same off-set dimension. paired. Such wheels or tires could have
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
Wheels of a different off-set could structural damage and could fail with-
as originally equipped. Recommended types and
cause premature tire wear, degrade ve- out warning.
sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the hicle handling characteristics and/or
“Technical and consumer information” section of ● The use of retread tires is not
interference with the brake
this manual. recommended.
discs/drums. Such interference can
lead to decreased braking efficiency ● For additional information regarding
WARNING and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re- tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-
● The use of tires other than those recom- fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni- formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
mended or the mixed use of tires of cal and consumer information” section tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
different brands, construction (bias, of this manual for wheel off-set tion Booklet.
bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns dimensions.
can adversely affect the ride, braking, Wheel balance
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
handling, ground clearance, body-to- is replaced, tire pressure will not be Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
tire clearance, tire chain clearance, indicated, the TPMS will not function and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get
speedometer calibration, headlight aim and the low tire pressure warning light out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-
and bumper height. Some of these ef- will flash for approximately 1 minute. anced as required.
fects may lead to accidents and could The light will remain on after 1 minute.
result in serious personal injury. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as Wheel balance service should be per-
possible for tire replacement and/or formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
system resetting. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the ● For additional information regarding
proper operation of the TPMS. tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
formation Booklet .


06/08/07—debbie ੭

Care of wheels WARNING ● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate
● The spare tire should be used for emer- than the standard tire. Replace the
to maintain their appearance. gency use only. It should be replaced spare tire as soon as the tread wear
with the standard tire at the first oppor- indicators appear.
● Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-
wheel is changed or the underside of the ● Do not use the spare tire on other
tial damage.
vehicle is washed. vehicles.
● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid ● Do not use more than one spare tire at
the wheels. sharp turns and abrupt braking while the same time.
● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or driving. ● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of ● Periodically check spare tire inflation RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire CAUTION
● NISSAN recommends waxing the road
at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).
wheels to protect against road salt in areas ● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-
where it is used during winter. ● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
tire installed do not drive the vehicle at will not fit properly and may cause dam-
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h). age to the vehicle.
spare tire) (if so equipped) ● When driving on roads covered with ● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
Observe the following precautions if the TEM- snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE spare tire is smaller than the original
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used. ONLY spare tire should be used on the tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or rear wheels and the original tire used avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive
involved in an accident:
tire chains only on the front (original) the vehicle through an automatic car
tires. wash since it may get caught.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
When traveling or registering your vehicle in Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Vehicle identification number Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-25
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Event data recorders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-27
Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

06/08/07—debbie ੭

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
US measure Imp measure Liter
Fuel 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 75.6 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91) *1
Engine oil *6
Drain and Refill
With oil filter change 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 4.2
• Engine oil with API Certification Mark *2
Without oil filter 4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 qt 4.0 • Viscosity SAE 5W-30 *2
change
Cooling system
With reservoir 2-1/4 gal 1-7/8 gal 8.5 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent
50% Demineralized or distilled water
CVT fluid See a NISSAN dealer for service. Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 *3
Power steering fluid (PSF) Refill to the proper level according to the instructions Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*7
Brake fluid in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section. Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *4 or equivalent DOT 3
Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)
Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a) *5
Air conditioning system oil — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *5
Windshield washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-
freeze or equivalent
*1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation.”
*2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation.”
*3: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
*4: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.
*5: For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations.”
*6: For further details, see “Engine Oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
*7: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRON™ III/MERCON™, or equivalent ATF may also be used.

9-2 Technical and consumer information

06/09/07—cathy ੭

FUEL RECOMMENDATION cations where it is available. Many of the automo- ● If an oxygenate-blend other than
bile manufacturers developed this specification methanol blend is used, it should con-
NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded pre- to improve emission control system and vehicle tain no more than 10% oxygenate.
mium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 performance. Ask your service station manager if (MTBE may, however, be added up to
AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research oc- the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications. 15%.)
tane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is
not available you may use unleaded regular gaso- Reformulated gasoline ● If a methanol blend is used, it should
line with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI contain no more than 5% methanol
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu- (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
number (Research octane number 91), but you
lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially should also contain a suitable amount
may notice a decrease in performance.
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN of appropriate cosolvents and corro-
supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug- sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-
CAUTION
gests that you use reformulated gasoline when lated with appropriate cosolvents and
● Using a fuel other than that specified available. corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
could adversely affect the emission
Gasoline containing oxygenates blends may cause fuel system damage
control system, and may also affect the
and/or vehicle performance problems.
warranty coverage.
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy- At this time, sufficient data is not avail-
● Under no circumstances should a genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with able to ensure that all methanol blends
leaded gasoline be used, because this or without advertising their presence. NISSAN are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-
will damage the three-way catalyst. does not recommend the use of fuels of which the hicles.
● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for
your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in If any driveability problems such as engine stall-
Your vehicle is not designed to run on ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage doubt, ask your service station manager.
using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
the fuel system components and is not If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim- the following precautions as the usage of such
ited warranty. low blend of MTBE.
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
and/or fuel system damage. Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-
Gasoline specifications eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can
● The fuel should be unleaded and have
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets cause paint damage.
an octane rating no lower than that
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi- recommended for unleaded gasoline.
Technical and consumer information 9-3

06/08/07—debbie ੭

E–85 fuel roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the ● U.S. government regulations require
condition. Failure to correct the condition ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN fied by a small, square, orange and
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can is not responsible. black label with the common abbrevia-
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark tion or the appropriate percentage for
not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may that region.
regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange cause excessive fuel consumption or engine
and black label with the common abbreviation or damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-
the appropriate percentage for that region. countered, have your vehicle checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
Aftermarket fuel additives
However, now and then you may notice
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
light spark knock for a short time while
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit
removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. cause for concern, because you get the
Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish greatest fuel benefit when there is light
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or spark knock for a short time under heavy
similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel engine load.
system and engine.
CAUTION
Octane rating tips
● Your vehicle is not designed to run on
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle
rating lower than recommended can cause not specifically designed for E-85 fuel
persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark can damage fuel system components
knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se- and is not covered by the NISSAN new
vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you vehicle limited warranty.
detect a persistent heavy spark knock even
● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%
when using gasoline of the stated octane
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded
rating, or if you hear steady spark knock
gasoline.
while holding a steady speed on level

06/08/07—debbie ੭

Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-
ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil
viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-
placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
WTI0183 equivalent for the reason described in “Change
intervals”.
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-
RECOMMENDATIONS cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica- Change intervals
tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
Selecting the correct oil do not have the specified quality label should not
engine are based on the use of the specified
be used as they could cause engine damage.
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters
and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory Oil additives that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding
engine life and performance. See ЉCapacities recommended oil and filter change intervals
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
and recommended fuel/lubricantsЉ earlier in this
additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces- caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-
section. NISSAN recommends the use of an
sary when the proper oil type is used and main- rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not
energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel
tenance intervals are followed. covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-
economy.
ranty.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been
Select only engine oils that meet the American
previously used should not be used.
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-
tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

06/08/07—debbie ੭

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air
oil when it was built. You do not have to change REFRIGERANT AND OIL conditioner system.
the oil before the first recommended change
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend RECOMMENDATIONS
upon how you use your vehicle. The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
Operation under the following conditions may vehicle must be charged with the refriger-
require more frequent oil and filter changes: ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSAN
A/C system oil Type S or the exact equiva-
● repeated short distance driving at cold out- lents.
side temperatures
● driving in dusty conditions CAUTION
● extensive idling The use of any other refrigerant or oil will
cause severe damage to the air condition-
● towing a trailer ing system and will require the replace-
● stop and go commuting ment of all air conditioner system
components.
Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide” for the maintenance schedule. The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the
earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-
tions require the recovery and recycling of any
refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-
tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained
technicians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-
ant.


06/09/07—cathy ੭

SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE

Model VQ35DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°
Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)
Displacement cu in (cm3) 213.45 (3,498)
Firing order 1–2–3–4–5–6

Idle speed

CVT (in “N” position)
No adjustment is necessary.
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)
CO % at idle

Spark plug DILFR5A11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain
The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Wheels Overall length in (mm) 194.4(4,937)
17 x 7JJ Overall width in (mm) 71.7(1,821)
18 x 7.5JJ Overall height in (mm) 58.3(1,480)
Tires Front Track
P225/55R17 95V 17 inch tire in (mm) 61.4(1,560)
P245/45R18 96V 18 inch tire in (mm) 61.0(1,549)
Spare tire Rear Track
Temporary T145/80*17 17 inch tire in (mm) 61.6(1,565)
Full size 17” or 18” 18 inch tire in (mm) 61.2(1,554)
Speed rating 17” V Wheelbase in (mm) 111.2(2,824)
18” V Gross vehicle weight lb (kg)
See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.
rating
*: “R” or “D” depending on tire manufacturer V.S.S. certification label”
Gross axle weight rating on the center pillar be-
Front lb (kg) tween the driver’s side
front and rear doors.
Rear lb (kg)


06/08/07—debbie ੭

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER
COUNTRY
When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-
hicle in another country, you should first find
out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-
cle’s engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-
fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where
appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
WTI0171 LTI0070
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-
sion control and safety standards vary according VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
to the country, state, province or district; there- (VIN) PLATE (chassis number)
fore, vehicle specifications may differ.
The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is The vehicle identification number is located as
When any vehicle is to be taken into an- attached as shown. This number is the identifica- shown.
other country, state, province or district tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
and registered, its modifications, transpor- registration.
tation, and registration are the responsibil-
ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible
for any inconvenience that may result.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

WTI0049 WTI0172 WTI0173
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. EMISSION CONTROL
The number is stamped on the engine as shown. CERTIFICATION LABEL INFORMATION LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety The emission control information label is at-
Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la- tached to the underside of the hood as shown.
bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-
able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle
Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review
it carefully.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

WTI0174 WTI0167
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and The air conditioner specification label is affixed to
Loading Information label. The label is located as the underside of the hood as shown.
shown.

WTI0177


06/08/07—debbie ੭

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

Use the following steps to mount the front license
WARNING ● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
plate: weight plus the combined weight of
Before mounting the license plate, confirm that ● It is extremely dangerous to ride passengers and cargo.
the following parts are enclosed in the plastic in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In
bag: a collision, people riding in these ● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
areas are more likely to be seri- ing) - maximum total combined
● License plate bracket ously injured or killed. weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-
● License plate bracket screws x 2 ● Do not allow people to ride in any sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
● License plate screws x 2 area of your vehicle that is not tongue load and any other optional
equipped with seats and seat equipment. This information is lo-
● Screw grommets x 2 cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
belts.
1. Make a shallow hole in the bumper fascia at certification label.
the location marks (small dimples) using a ● Be sure everyone in your vehicle
0.39 in (10 mm) drill. To avoid damaging the is in a seat and using a seat belt ● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
area behind the fascia, apply only light pres- properly. maximum weight (load) limit specified
sure to the drill. for the front or rear axle. This informa-
TERMS tion is located on the
2. Insert the grommets into the holes in the
bumper fascia. It is important to familiarize yourself with F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
3. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into the following terms before loading your label.
the grommet hole to turn the threaded part of vehicle: ● GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
the grommet 90°. rating) - The maximum total weight
● Curb Weight (actual weight of your
4. Mount the license plate bracket using the vehicle) - vehicle weight including: rating of the vehicle, passengers,
two longer screws.
standard and optional equipment, flu- cargo, and trailer.
5. Use the two shorter hex head screws to ids, emergency tools, and spare tire
mount the license plate to the license plate assembly. This weight does not in-
bracket.
clude passengers and cargo.


06/08/07—debbie ੭

● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Total load capacity - maximum total
Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-
weight limit specified of the load
hicle shown as “The combined weight of
(passengers and cargo) for the ve-
occupants and cargo” on the Tire and
hicle. This is the maximum combined
Loading Information label. Do not exceed
weight of occupants and cargo that
the number of occupants shown as
can be loaded into the vehicle. If the
“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-
vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
ing Information label.
trailer tongue weight must be in-
cluded as part of the cargo load. This To get “the combined weight of occu-
information is located on the Tire and pants and cargo”, add the weight of all
Loading Information label (if so occupants, then add the total luggage
equipped). weight. Examples are shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
● Cargo capacity - permissible weight
of cargo, the subtracted weight of
occupants from the load limit.


06/09/07—cathy ੭

Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)
= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)

LTI0152
Example

06/08/07—debbie ੭

5. Determine the combined weight of LOADING TIPS ● Overloading not only can shorten
luggage and cargo being loaded on the life of your vehicle and the
the vehicle. That weight may not ● The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the tire, but can also cause unsafe
safely exceed the available cargo and vehicle handling and longer brak-
luggage load capacity calculated in F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification ing distances. This may cause a
Step 4. label. premature tire failure which
● Do not load the front and rear axle to could result in a serious accident
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, and personal injury. Failures
load from your trailer will be trans- the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the caused by overloading are not
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this GVWR. covered by the vehicle’s
manual to determine how this re- warranty.
duces the available cargo and lug- WARNING
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
● Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it Secure loose items to prevent weight
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
from sliding or shifting. Do not shifts that could affect the balance of your
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle place cargo higher than the seat- vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle backs. In a sudden stop or colli- to a scale and weigh the front and the rear
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. sion, unsecured cargo could wheels separately to determine axle
See “Measurement of Weights” later in cause personal injury. loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-
this section.
● Do not load your vehicle any ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-
Also check tires for proper inflation pres- heavier than the GVWR or the ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads
sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa- maximum front and rear GAWRs. should not exceed the gross vehicle
tion label. If you do, parts of your vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are
can break, tire damage

2008 MAXIMA OWNER'S MANUAL

More Related Content

Similar to 2008 MAXIMA OWNER'S MANUAL

More from Classic Cars Nissan

Recently uploaded

2008 MAXIMA OWNER'S MANUAL